Subaru 2006 B9 Tribeca Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Subaru Subaru-2006-B9-Tribeca-Owners-Manual-762982 subaru-2006-b9-tribeca-owners-manual-762982 subaru pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 377 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this man-

ual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-

TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and de-

signs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any ob-

ligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previous-

ly sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all

equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations,

therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

000083 000084

– CONTINUED –

Warranties

Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

ySUBARU Limited Warranty

yEmission Control Systems Warranty

yEmissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

TWarranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

ySUBARU Limited Warranty

yAnti-Corrosion Warranty

yEmission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please

read these warranties carefully.

How to use this owner’s man-

ual

Using your Owner’s manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle, fol-

low the instructions in this manual. Failure

to observe these instructions may result in

serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the infor-

mation you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-

bags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

If your vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system and/or Rear Seat

Entertainment System, the displays

contain mercury. Therefore, the dis-

plays of the navigation system and/

or Rear Seat Entertainment System

must be removed before vehicle dis-

posal. Once the displays have been

removed, please reuse, recycle or

dispose of them as hazardous

waste.

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running prop-

erly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension

and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Tire infor-

mation, Uniform tire quality grading stan-

dards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual careful-

ly in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safe-

ly.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your vehi-

cle, or both, could result if the cau-

tion is ignored.

000013

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

Mark Name

CAUTION

Passengers’ windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Seat heater

Child restraint lower anchor-

ages

Child restraint top tether an-

chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and wash-

Rear window wiper and

washer

Lights

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate lights and instru-

ment panel illumination

Head lights

Turn signal

Illumination brightness

Engine hood

Fan speed

Mark Name

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and

foot outlets

Windshield defroster

Rear window defogger/Out-

side mirror defogger

Air recirculation

Outside air

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (Transmitter)

Door unlock (Transmitter)

Mark Name

Safety precautions when

driving

Seatbelt and SRS airbag

Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelt

and SRS airbags” in chapter 1 of this own-

er’s manual for instructions and precau-

tions concerning the seatbelt system and

SRS airbag system.

Rear gate (Transmitter)

Mark Name

yAll persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

yTo obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the driv-

er and all passengers in the vehi-

cle should always wear seatbelts

when the vehicle is moving. The

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) airbag does not do away with

the need to fasten seatbelts. In

combination with the seatbelts, it

offers the best combined protec-

tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the ve-

hicle has the SRS airbag.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

– CONTINUED –

Child safety

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint

systems”, “*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts”

in chapter 1 of this owner’s manual for in-

structions and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

yNever hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will be

caught between the passenger

and objects inside the vehicle.

yWhile riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be placed in one of the rear seat-

ing positions recommended in

this owner’s manual in an infant

or child restraint system which is

appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight. If a child is too

big for a child restraint system,

the child should sit in a REAR seat

and be restrained using the seat-

belts. According to accident sta-

tistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a

child to stand up or kneel on the

seat.

yPut children aged 12 and under in

a REAR seat properly restrained

at all times in a child restraint de-

vice or in a seatbelt. The SRS air-

bag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and under

and are not restrained or improp-

erly restrained. Because children

are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

yNEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLAC-

ING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

yAlways use the child safety locks

whenever a child rides in the rear.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to the

“Door locks” section in chapter 2.

yAlways lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child op-

erating the power window. Refer

to the “Power windows” section

in chapter 2.

yNever leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could acci-

dentally injure themselves or oth-

ers through inadvertent operation

of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sun-

ny days, temperature in a closed

vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to them.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

Drinking and driving

Drunken driving is one of the most fre-

quent causes of accidents. Since alcohol

affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up com-

pletely before getting behind the wheel.

Drugs and driving

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter-

ature that accompanies the medication to

determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive af-

ter taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

yNever inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

yAlways properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

yNever run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

yAvoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a lengthy time while the en-

gine is running. If that is unavoid-

able, then use the ventilation fan

to force fresh air into the vehicle.

yAlways keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system always

works properly.

yIf at any time you suspect that ex-

haust fumes are entering the vehi-

cle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possi-

ble. If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all win-

dows fully open.

yKeep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and im-

pairs your perception, judgment and

attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a lit-

tle – it will increase the risk of being

involved in a serious or fatal acci-

dent, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In ad-

dition, if you are injured in the acci-

dent, alcohol may increase the se-

verity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fa-

tal accident.

– CONTINUED –

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

Driving when tired or sleepy

Please do not continue to drive but in-

stead find a safe place to rest if you are

tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should

make periodic rest stops to refresh your-

self before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the driv-

ing with others.

Car phone/cell phone and

driving

Modification of your vehicle

Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unre-

strained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be prop-

erly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a

pet with a special traveling harness which

can be secured to the rear seat with a

seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a seat-

belt through the carrier’s handle. Never re-

strain pets or pet carriers in the front pas-

senger’s seat. For further information,

consult your veterinarian, local animal

protection society or pet shop.

Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your pas-

sengers’ and other persons’ chanc-

es of being involved in a serious ac-

cident may increase.

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your at-

tention from driving and can lead to

an accident. If you use a car phone/

cell phone, pull off the road and park

in a safe place before using your

phone. In some States/Provinces,

only hands-free phones may legally

be used while driving.

Your vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

sure of each tire (including the spare) at

least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold.

Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire

pressures to the values shown on the tire

placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

chapter 11 for detailed information.

California proposition 65

warning

On-pavement and off-road

driving

This vehicle is classified as a utility vehi-

cle. Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of ve-

hicles. Designed not only for on-pavement

use but also for off-road driving, your B9

TRIBECA has a higher ground clearance

and higher center of gravity, making it

more likely to roll over than ordinary pas-

senger cars. It also handles and maneu-

vers differently from other passenger cars.

For this reason, please read carefully the

“On-pavement and off road driving” sec-

tion in chapter 8 of this owner’s manual

and follow the instructions and precau-

tions in order to prevent serious injury or

death due to loss of control, rollover and

other accidents.

Engine exhaust, some of its constit-

uents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

Exterior

45231

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 000085

1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)

2) Headlight switch (page 3-26)

3) Bulb replacement (page 11-39)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-30)

5) Moonroof (page 2-23)

6) Door locks (page 2-4)

7) Tire pressure (page 11-25)

8) Flat tires (page 9-7)

9) Tire chains (page 8-11)

10) Fog light switch (page 3-28)

11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)

12) Towing hook (page 9-15)

– CONTINUED –

786

5231

000105

1) Rear gate (page 2-22)

2) Rear wiper blade assembly and rub-

ber replacement (page 3-32)

3) Rear window defogger button (page

3-33)

4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)

5) Child safety locks (page 2-19)

6) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)

7) Bulb replacement (page 11-39)

8) Towing hook (page 9-15)

Interior

TPassenger compartment area

000086

1) Seatbelt (page 1-15)

2) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-38)

3) Center console (page 6-5)

4) Front seat (page 1-2)

5) Second-row seat (page 1-6)

6) Third-row seat (page 1-11)

– CONTINUED –

454

000087

1) Cargo area light (page 6-2)

2) Dome lights (page 6-2)

3) Rear center seatbelt (page 1-22)

4) Sun visors (page 6-3)

5) Map light (page 6-3)

6) Top tether anchorages (Rear seat/

Second-row seat) (page 1-41)

7) Top tether anchorages (Third-row

seat) (page 1-41)

123

4576 000088

1) Select lever (page 7-9)

2) Hazard warning flasher switch (page

3-5)

3) Multi function display (page 3-23)

4) Glove box (page 6-4)

5) Audio (page 5-1)

6) Climate control (page 4-1)

7) Cup holder (page 6-7/page 6-8)

– CONTINUED –

Instrument panel

12345 6 7 8

11121315 14 10 9 000106

1) Door locks (page 2-4)

2) Illumination brightness control (page

3-27)

3) Remote control mirror (page 3-36)

4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-32)

5) Traction Control system OFF switch

(page 7-23)

6) Light control lever (page 3-26)

7) Combination meter (page 3-5)

8) Wiper control lever (page 3-29)

9) Cruise control (page 7-27)

10) Horn (page 3-37)

11) SRS airbag (page 1-44)

12) Tilt steering (page 3-37)

13) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)

14) Fuse box (page 11-36)

15) Power windows (page 2-19)

Light control and wiper control levers/switches

11 10

000107

1) Parking light switch (page 3-28)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-29)

3) Mist (page 3-31)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-30)

5) Rear window wiper and washer

switch (page 3-32)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-30)

7) Light control lever (page 3-26)

8) Fog light switch (page 3-28)

9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-26)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-26)

11) Turn signal (page 3-27)

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter

TU.S.-spec. vehicles

3421

76 5 000110

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

2) Tachometer (page 3-7)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)

5) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6/

page 3-7)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-7)

7) Selector lever/Gear position indicator

(page 3-20)

TCanada-spec. vehicles

3421

76 5 000111

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

2) Tachometer (page 3-7)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)

5) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6/

page 3-7)

6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-7)

7) Selector lever/Gear position indicator

(page 3-20)

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator light

Mark Name Page

Driver’s seatbelt warn-

ing light 3-10

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light 3-10

SRS airbag system

warning light 3-11

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator lamp

3-12

Charge warning light 3-13

Oil pressure warning

light 3-13

AT OIL temperature

warning light 3-13

or ABS warning light 3-15

or Brake system warning

light 3-16

Door open warning

light 3-17

Low fuel warning light 3-17

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light 3-17

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

3-18

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light /

Traction Control sys-

tem OFF indicator light

3-18

Security indicator light 3-19

Turn signal indicator

lights 3-20

High beam indicator

light 3-20

Front fog light indicator

light 3-20

Cruise control indica-

tor light 3-20

Cruise control set indi-

cator light 3-20

Headlight indicator

light 3-20

Mark Name Page

Low tire pressure

warning light 3-14

Passenger airbag ON

indicator light 3-12

Passenger airbag OFF

indicator light 3-12

SPORT mode indica-

tor light 3-19

Windshield washer flu-

id warning light 3-17

Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light

3-14

Mark Name Page

Cargo area

T7-seater models

000089

1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Maintenance tools (page 9-19)

3) Jack (page 9-19)

4) Spare tire (page 9-2)

– CONTINUED –

T5-seater models

000148

1) Jack handle (page 9-19)

2) Jack (page 9-19)

3) Maintenance tools (page 9-19)

4) Spare tire (page 9-2)

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system, the settings for some of these functions can

be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the monitor.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-14

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of

doors)

0 second / 30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16

Impact sensor operation (only vehicles

with shock sensors (dealer option))

Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-18

Passive arming Operation / Non-operation Non-operation 2-17

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-8

Audible signal Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-10

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 min. / Continuous opera-

tion

Operation for

15 min.

3-33

Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)

Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 min. / Continuous opera-

tion

Operation for

15 min.

3-32

Map light/Dome light Operation in interlock with remote keyless

entry system

OFF / Short / Normal / Long Normal 6-2

Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

Battery drainage prevention function Operation / Non-operation Operation 2-6

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats .......................................................... 1-2

Power seat ............................................................... 1-3

Reclining the seatback ........................................... 1-3

Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-4

Active head restraint .............................................. 1-5

Lumbar support ...................................................... 1-5

Seat heater (if equipped) ................................... 1-6

Rear seats (5-seater models)/Second-row

seats (7-seater models) .................................. 1-6

Fore and aft adjustment ......................................... 1-7

Reclining the seatback ........................................... 1-8

Folding down the seatback .................................... 1-9

Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-10

Armrest .................................................................... 1-11

Third-row seat (7-seater models) ...................... 1-11

Access to the third-row seat .................................. 1-12

Folding down the seatback .................................... 1-13

Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-14

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-15

Seatbelt safety tips ................................................. 1-15

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................... 1-16

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) .................................................................. 1-16

Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 1-17

Fastening the seatbelt ............................................ 1-18

Seatbelt maintenance ............................................. 1-26

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-27

System monitors .................................................... 1-28

System servicing .................................................... 1-29

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-29

Child restraint systems ...................................... 1-30

Where to place a child restraint system ............... 1-31

Choosing a child restraint system ........................ 1-33

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt .................................................................. 1-33

Installing a booster seat ......................................... 1-37

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ............... 1-38

Top tether anchorages ........................................... 1-41

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag) .............................................................. 1-44

Your vehicle’s SRS configuration ......................... 1-44

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system .............. 1-49

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag .............. 1-59

SRS airbag system monitors ................................. 1-66

SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-67

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-68

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

yNever adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of loss

of vehicle control and of personal

injury.

yBefore adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers are clear of the

adjusting mechanism.

ySeatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should be always

used in the upright position while

the vehicle is running. If the front

seatbacks are not used in the up-

right position in a collision, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen will increase, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

100350

Put children aged 12 and under in a

rear seat properly restrained at all

times. The SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children, es-

pecially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have out-

grown child restraint devices) sit in

a REAR seat properly restrained at

all times in a child restraint device or

in a seatbelt, whichever is appropri-

ate for the child’s age, height and

weight.

Always secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including forward

facing child seats) in one of the rear

seating positions recommended in

this owner’s manual.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

Power seat

TFore and aft adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or back-

ward.

NOTE

During backward-forward adjustment

of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat

cushion angle or seat height.

Reclining the seatback

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, see the “Child restraint sys-

tems” section in this chapter.

100351

100085

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Also, do not place

objects such as cushions between

the passenger and the seatback. If

you do so, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

100354

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TSeat cushion angle adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

TSeat height adjustment (Driver’s

seat only)

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To

lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is clos-

est to the top of the occupant’s ears.

100352 100353

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

100355

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle are

equipped with active head restraints. They

automatically tilt forward slightly in the

event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head

movement and thus reducing the risk of

whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the

head restraint should be adjusted so that

the center of the head restraint is closest

to the top of the occupant’s ears.

Lumbar support

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the

amount of support for your lower back.

100089

yEach active head restraint is ef-

fective only when its height is

properly adjusted and the driver/

passenger sits in the correct posi-

tion on the seat.

yIf your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer inspect the

active head restraints.

yThe active head restraints may

not operate in the event the vehi-

cle experiences only a slight im-

pact in the rear.

yThe active head restraints may be

damaged if they are pushed hard

from behind or subjected to

shock. As a result, they may not

function if the vehicle suffers a

rear impact.

100356

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position.

The seat heater can be adjusted in three

levels. Press the button to activate the

seat heater. Each subsequent press of the

button will reduce the level. Pushing the

button four times or keeping the button

pressed for approximately 1 second will

turn the heater off. While the seat heater is

operating, its operating level is shown by

the number of illuminated indicators. To

warm the seat as quickly as possible, set

the heater with three indicators illuminat-

ed.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

Rear seats (5-seater models)/

Second-row seats (7-seater

models)

100357

yThere is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the seat heater

for a long period of time. When us-

ing the heater, always be sure to

warn the persons concerned.

yDo not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

ySeatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants and

seatbacks or seat cushions. If you

do so, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will in-

crease, and both can result in se-

rious internal injury or death.

100358

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

– CONTINUED –

Fore and aft adjustment

T5-seater models

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the le-

ver and move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

T7-seater models

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position.

When the right seat or the left seat pair is

slid rearward, it stops partway at the lock

yBefore adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of the rear

seat passengers are clear of the

adjusting mechanism (7-seater

models only).

Never adjust the seat while driving.

Doing so is dangerous as the seat

could move rapidly and you could

be injured.

100094

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

100359

100384

1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

point so as not to trap the legs of passen-

gers sitting on the third-row seat.

It is possible to slide the seat or seat pair

further rearward by releasing the lock that

stops it. To do this, simultaneously pull the

lever under the outboard seat cushion and

turn the lever on the side of the seat cush-

ion outward when sliding the seat or seat

pair.

Once you have released the lock, you can

slide the seat or seat pair back and forth

with only the lever under the seat cushion

pulled. If you slide the seat or seat pair for-

ward of the lock point, you will need to re-

lease the lock again before you can slide

it behind the point.

Then release the lever and move the seat

back and forth to make sure that it is se-

curely locked into place.

Reclining the seatback

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback

to the desired position.

Then release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

If you slide the seat or seat pair aft of

the lock point while the third-row

seat is occupied, be careful not to

trap the legs of the third-row pas-

sengers.

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Also, do not place

objects such as cushions between

the passenger and the seatback. If

you do so, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

100085

In a 7-seater model vehicle, never al-

low the third-row seat passengers to

adjust the seatback of the second

row. Doing so is dangerous as the

seatback will tilt rapidly and could

injure the passengers.

100360

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

– CONTINUED –

Folding down the seatback

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear-

most position.

2. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

3. Unlock the seatback by pulling the le-

ver and then fold the seatback down.

4. To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place. Make sure it is securely locked.

By pulling the tab on the center seat, you

can fold only the seatback of the center

seat.

To return the seatback to its original posi-

tion, raise the seatback until it locks into

place. Make sure it is securely locked.

yAfter returning the seat to its orig-

inal position, be certain to place

all of the seatbelts and the tab at-

tached to the seat cushion above

the seat cushion. And make cer-

tain that the shoulder belts are ful-

ly visible.

yNever allow passengers to ride on

the folded seatback or in the car-

go area. Doing so may result in se-

rious injury or death.

ySecure skis and other lengthy

items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

100361 100366

1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1) Bar

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach the

tongue plate of each rear/second-row

seatbelt to the corresponding holder.

Do the same also before someone gets

into the third-row seat.

Head restraint adjustment

TWindow side seats

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is clos-

est to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

yFolding the seatback of the center

seat will expose the bar that re-

tains it in the raised position. Be

careful not to hurt yourself on it.

Especially, do not rest your finger

on the bar. Otherwise, when the

seatback is raised, your finger

could be pinched between the bar

and seatback and thus injured.

yRaise the seatback of the center

seat while taking care not to trap

your hands or other parts of the

body between the center seat and

window-side seat.

100681

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

100362

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position. Be-

fore sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate po-

sition depending on your sitting

height.

100363

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

– CONTINUED –

the head restraints to improve rearward

visibility.

TCenter seat

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is clos-

est to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the center seat is not occupied, low-

er the head restraint to improve rearward

visibility.

Armrest

To lower the armrest, pull on the strap of

the armrest.

Third-row seat (7-seater

models)

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position. Be-

fore sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate po-

sition depending on your sitting

height.

100364

To avoid the possibility of serious

injury, passengers must never be al-

lowed to sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

100675 Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the ab-

domen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

100367

1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Access to the third-row seat

There is a lever on the side of the second-

row seat behind the front passenger’s

seat. This lever is used to facilitate access

to the third-row seat.

TTo access the third-row seat

Raise the lever. The seatback of the sec-

ond-row seat will tip forward and the seat

will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

100094

In its slid-forward position with the

seatback tipped forward, the sec-

ond-row seat behind the front pas-

senger seat is not locked and free to

move. Do not drive the vehicle with

the seat in this state or allow anyone

to sit on the seat unless it is com-

pletely locked. Doing so may result

in serious injury or death.

When getting into or out of the third-

row seat, make sure the second-row

seat is in the completely slid-for-

ward position and be sure to watch

your step.

100368

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

– CONTINUED –

TTo get out from the third-row seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat.

The seatback of the second-row seat will

tip forward and the seat will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

Folding down the seatback

Place the head restraint in its lowest posi-

tion, pull up the lever to release the seat-

back lock, and fold down the seatback.

To return the seatback to its original posi-

tion, raise the seatback until it locks into

place. Make sure it is securely locked.

100677

yAfter returning the seat to its orig-

inal position, be certain to place

all of the seatbelts and the tab at-

tached to the seat cushion above

the seat cushion. And make cer-

tain that the shoulder belts are ful-

ly visible.

yNever allow passengers to ride on

the folded seatback or in the car-

go area. Doing so may result in se-

rious injury or death.

ySecure skis and other lengthy

items properly to prevent them

from being thrown around inside

the vehicle and causing serious

injury during a sudden stop, a

sudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

100369

1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE

1) Holder

yBefore folding or raising the seat-

back of the third-row seat, confirm that

the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall

at the lower point and the webbing is

attached to the holder.

yWhen raising the seatback of the

third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches

on the seatback, hold the belt forward

of the seatback while latching the seat-

back.

Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is clos-

est to the top of the occupant’s ears.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraints to improve rearward

visibility.

100647

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

100371

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position. Be-

fore sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to an appropriate po-

sition depending on your sitting

height.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts

Seatbelt safety tips

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploys.

TInfants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suit-

able for your vehicle. See information on

“Child restraint systems” in this chapter.

TChildren

If a child is too big for a child restraint sys-

tem, the child should sit in the rear seat

yAll persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

yAll belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose fit-

ting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

yEach seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

yReplace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attaching

hardware worn by occupants of a

vehicle that has been in a serious

accident. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if dam-

age is not obvious.

yPut children aged 12 and under in

a rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are 12

years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from de-

ployment is greater. Consequent-

ly, we strongly recommend that

ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices)

sit in a REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child re-

straint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s height and weight.

Always secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in one of

the rear seating positions recom-

mended in this owner’s manual.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating po-

sitions. For instructions and pre-

cautions concerning the child re-

straint system, see the “Child re-

straint systems” section in this

chapter.

1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

and be restrained using the seatbelts. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to stand up

or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating posi-

tions only) and then if necessary move the

child closer to the belt buckle to help pro-

vide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be

taken to securely place the lap belt as low

as possible on the hips and not on the

child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

TExpectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap

belt should be worn securely and as low

as possible over the hips, not over the

waist.

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

Automatic/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/

ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/

ELR has an additional locking mode “Au-

tomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode” in-

tended to secure a child restraint system.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out com-

pletely and is then retracted even slightly,

the retractor locks the seatbelt in that po-

sition and the seatbelt cannot be extend-

ed. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be

heard which indicate the retractor func-

tions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retract-

ed fully, ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the passengers’ seats, the seatbelt must

be changed over to the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the retractor is re-

stored to the Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR) function by allowing the seatbelt

to retract fully.

For instructions on how to convert the re-

tractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

100100

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following il-

lustrations and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

TOperation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-

sition, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat-

belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s

seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened 6 sec-

onds later, both warning lights or the

warning light for the unfastened seatbelt

will remain lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/is

still not fastened even 15 seconds later

(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition

switch), the warning lights will alternate

between flashing and steady illumination

at 15-second intervals, and the chime will

sound while the warning light(s) is/are

flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until both driver and

front passenger fasten their seatbelts.

NOTE

yIf the driver and/or front passenger

unfasten(s) the seatbelt(s) after fasten-

ing, the seatbelt warning device oper-

ates as follows according to the vehi-

cle speed.

yAt speeds lower than approximate-

ly 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

yAt speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

yIt is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

100372

PASS

100373

1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch by unfastening and refastening

the driver’s seatbelt. When the ignition

switch is turned ON next time, howev-

er, the complete sequence of the warn-

ing operation resumes. For further de-

tails about canceling the warning oper-

ation, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front pas-

senger’s seat, the seatbelt warning device

for the front passenger’s seat will be deac-

tivated. The front passenger’s occupant

detection system monitors whether or not

there is a passenger on the front passen-

ger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from func-

tioning correctly or cause the device to

fail.

yDo not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

yDo not store a heavy load in the seat-

back pocket.

yDo not allow the rear seat/second-row

seat occupant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s seatback, or

allow him/her to pull the seatback.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is de-

activated even when the front passenger

has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and the child occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat still does not function

correctly after taking relevant corrective

actions described above, immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an in-

spection.

Fastening the seatbelt

yNever use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of in-

jury.

yKeep the lap belt as low as possi-

ble on your hips. In a collision,

this spreads the force of the lap

belt over stronger hip bones in-

stead of across the weaker abdo-

men.

ySeatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should be always

used in the upright position while

the vehicle is running. If the front

seatbacks are not used in the up-

right position in a collision, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen will increase, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

yDo not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants and

seatbacks or seat cushions. If you

do so, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will in-

crease, and both can result in se-

rious internal injury or death.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

– CONTINUED –

TFront seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seatback as far

from the steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an ac-

cident occurs, this can increase the

risk or severity of injury.

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can be-

come very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

100101

100102

100103

1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VAdjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. To lower the an-

chor height, push the release button and

slide the anchor down. To raise the an-

chor height, slide the anchor up. Pull down

on the anchor to make sure that it is

locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

TRear seatbelts (5-seater models)/

Second-row seatbelts (7-seater

models) – excluding center seatbelt

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

100374

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

100105 100102

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

– CONTINUED –

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

VAdjusting the shoulder belt anchor

height (rear seats of 5-seater mod-

els/second-row seats of 7-seater

models)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for

you. To lower the anchor height, push the

release button and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the an-

chor up. Pull down on the anchor to make

sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

100103

100375

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

100105

1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach the

tongue plate of each rear/second-row

seatbelt to the corresponding holder.

Do the same also before someone gets

into the third-row seat.

TRear center seatbelt (5-seater mod-

els)/second-row center seatbelt (7-

seater models)

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

100362

100376

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not twist-

ed.

100108

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23

– CONTINUED –

Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of

the ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate

from the slot located at the front of the re-

cess by pulling the connector (tongue)

plate rearward.

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

overhead retractor.

3. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue) at-

tached at the webbing end into the buckle

on the right-hand side until a click is heard.

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates

to the respective buckles. If the

seatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connec-

tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),

it cannot properly restrain the wear-

er in position in an accident, possi-

bly resulting in serious injury or

death.

100377 100378 100379

100678

1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Make sure that the “ ” mark on the

connector (tongue) and the “ ” mark

on the buckle are aligned.

If the belt stops before reaching the buck-

le, return the belt slightly and pull it out

more slowly. If the belt still cannot be un-

locked, let the belt retract slightly after giv-

ing it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

in the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as

low as possible on your hips, not on your

waist.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed ob-

ject into the slot in the connector (buckle)

on the right-hand side and push it in, and

100114

100310

100116

100381

100382

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25

– CONTINUED –

the connector (tongue) plate will discon-

nect from the buckle.

2. With the belt held by hand, allow the re-

tractor to roll up the belt slowly. You

should hold the webbing end and guide it

back into the retractor while it is rolling up.

Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess

on the ceiling and then insert the connec-

tor (tongue) plate into the slot located at

the front of the recess.

TThird-row seatbelt (7-seater models)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

200300

yDo not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-

wise, the metal tongue plates may

hit against the trim, resulting in

damaged trim.

yHave the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are neat-

ly stored. A hanging tongue plate

can swing and hit against the trim

during driving, causing damage to

the trim.

100383

100102

1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

NOTE

1) Holder

yBefore folding or raising the seat-

back of the third-row seat, confirm that

the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall

at the lower point and the webbing is

attached to the holder.

yWhen raising the seatback of the

third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches

on the seatback, hold the belt forward

of the seatback while latching the seat-

back.

Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously af-

fect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments in-

cluding the webbing and all hardware pe-

riodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

100103

100105

100647

yKeep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

yNever attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

– CONTINUED –

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat

and front passenger’s seat operate at the

same time as the frontal, and side SRS

airbags.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors. If

the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal col-

lision or a side impact collision, the front

seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re-

tractor to take up the slack so that the belt

more effectively restrains the front seat

occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can

not be pulled out and retracted and there-

fore must be replaced.

NOTE

ySeatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor frontal im-

pacts, in minor side impacts or rear im-

pacts or in roll-over accidents.

yThe seatbelt pretensioners for the

driver’s seat and front passenger’s

seat operate at the same time as the

frontal, and side SRS airbags.

yPretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies must be

replaced and only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

yIf either front seatbelt does not re-

tract or cannot be pulled out due to a

malfunction or activation of the preten-

sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

yIf the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been dam-

aged, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

yWhen you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him

to the contents of this section.

100121

yTo obtain maximum protection,

occupants should sit in an upright

position with their seatbelts prop-

erly fastened. Refer to “Seatbelts”

section in this chapter.

yDo not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor assem-

blies or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inoper-

ative, possibly resulting in seri-

ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners

have no user-serviceable parts.

For required servicing of front

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, see your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

System monitors

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The seat-

belt pretensioners share the control mod-

ule with the airbag system. Therefore, if

any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pre-

tensioner, the SRS airbag system warning

light will illuminate. The SRS airbag sys-

tem warning light will show normal system

operation by lighting for approximately 6

seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

yFront sub sensor (Right-hand side)

yFront sub sensor (Left-hand side)

yAirbag control module (including impact

sensors)

yFrontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

yFrontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

ySide airbag module (Driver’s side)

ySide airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

yCurtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house right-hand side)

yCurtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house left-hand side)

yCurtain airbag module (Right side)

yCurtain airbag module (Left side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

yDriver’s seat position sensor

yFront passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

control module

yFront passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

yAll related wiring

yWhen discarding front seatbelt re-

tractor assemblies or scrapping

the entire vehicle due to collision

damage or for other reasons, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

100385

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi-

nor collision or not inflate in a se-

vere collision), which may increase

the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

– CONTINUED –

System servicing

NOTE

If the front part of the vehicle is dam-

aged in an accident to the extent that

the seatbelt pretensioner does not op-

erate, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

yWhen discarding a seatbelt retrac-

tor assembly or scrapping the en-

tire vehicle damaged by a colli-

sion, consult your SUBARU deal-

er.

yTampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result in

accidental activation of the seat-

belt pretensioner and/or airbag or

could make the system inopera-

tive, which may result in serious

injury. The wiring harnesses of

the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS

airbag systems are covered with

yellow insulation and the connec-

tors of the system are yellow for

easy identification. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the seatbelt pre-

tensioner and airbag systems. For

required servicing of the seatbelt

pretensioner, see your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The front sub sensors are located in

both front fenders and the airbag

control module including the impact

sensors is located under the center

console. If you need service or re-

pair in those areas or near the front

seatbelt retractors, we recommend

that you have an authorized

SUBARU dealer perform the work.

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pertensioners.

yAttachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

yModification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Child restraint systems

While riding in the vehicle, infants and

small children should always be placed in

an infant or child restraint system in one of

the rear seating positions recommended

in this owner’s manual. You should use an

infant or child restraint system that meets

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards, is compatible with your vehicle and

is appropriate for the child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those covered under the section

in this manual, entitled “Installation of child

restraint systems by use of lower and teth-

er anchorages (LATCH)”).

Children could be endangered in an acci-

dent if their child restraints are not proper-

ly secured in the vehicle. When installing

the child restraint system, carefully follow

the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

yInstallation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle plac-

ard attached to the door pillar or

specified for individual vehicle

models in this Owner’s Manual.

100500

100125

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

– CONTINUED –

Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint sys-

tem (including a booster seat) due to the

hazard to children posed by the passen-

ger’s airbag.

B: Rear outboard seats (5-seater mod-

els)/second-row outboard seats (7-

seater models)

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency

Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and

lower anchorages (bars) are provided for

installing a child restraint system.

Some types of child restraints might not

be able to be secured firmly due to projec-

tion of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot pro-

tect the child from injury in a colli-

sion, because the child will be

caught between the passenger and

objects inside the vehicle. Addition-

ally, holding a child in your lap or

arms in the front seat exposes that

child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

100126

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up

or kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

100501

1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear center seat (5-seater models)/

second-row center seat (7-seater mod-

els)

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and an upper anchorage (tether an-

chorage) are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not

be able to be secured firmly due to projec-

tion of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

D: Third-row seat (7-seater models)

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and two upper anchorages (tether an-

chorages) are provided in these positions.

These seating positions are not equipped

with lower anchorages (bars) for installing

LATCH system-type child restraints. How-

ever, child restraint devices can be used

in these position using the A/ELR seat-

belts and upper anchorages (tether an-

chorages) provided.

Some types of child restraints might not

be able to be secured firmly due to projec-

tion of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

Consequently, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint devices

(including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint de-

vice which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

100261

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

– CONTINUED –

Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is ap-

propriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child re-

straint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for United States or

Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system

or the manufacture’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the sys-

tem. Also it is important for you to make

sure that the child restraint system is com-

patible with the vehicle in which it will be

used.

Installing child restraint sys-

tems with A/ELR seatbelt

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A

REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFE-

TY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE-

RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE

CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S

HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS

AIRBAG.

100502

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TInstalling a rearward facing child re-

straint

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear-

most position.

2. Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-

tion.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re-

tractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the re-

tractor functions as ALR.

8. Push and pull the child restraint system

forward and from side to side to check if it

is firmly secured.

Sometimes a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the seat-

belt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

100503

100504 100505

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35

– CONTINUED –

10.To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract com-

pletely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by retracting the

seatbelt fully.

TInstalling forward facing child re-

straint

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear-

most position.

2. Adjust the seatback to the upright posi-

tion.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

seating position.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re-

tractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the re-

tractor functions as ALR.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

100506

100507

100508

1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

8. Before having a child sit in the child re-

straint system, move it back and forth and

right and left to check if it is firmly secured.

Sometimes a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the seat-

belt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-row

seat (7-seater models)

Third-row seat (7-seater models)

10.If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top teth-

er anchor and tighten the top tether. See

the “Top tether anchorages” for additional

instructions.

11.To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract com-

pletely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

100509 100510

100511

100512

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

– CONTINUED –

Installing a booster seat

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear-

most position.

2. Place the booster seat in the rear seat-

ing position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

5. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

100513

100514

1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed in a rear seating position of

your vehicle without use of the seatbelts.

Such child restraint systems are secured

to the dedicated anchorages provided on

the vehicle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH sys-

tem (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren).

yNever use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of in-

jury to the child.

yNever place the shoulder belt un-

der the child’s arm or behind the

child’s back. If an accident oc-

curs, this can increase the risk or

severity of injury to the child.

yThe seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as ef-

fective in preventing or reducing

injury.

yPlace the lap belt as low as possi-

ble on the child’s hips. A high-po-

sitioned lap belt will increase the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

yMake sure the shoulder belt is po-

sitioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39

– CONTINUED –

Your vehicle is provided with child re-

straint system anchors as follows:

yFour lower anchorages (bars) and three

upper anchorages (tether anchorages) on

the rear seat (5-seater model)/second-row

seat (7-seater model)

Lower anchorages for child restraints are

provided in the following locations:

y5-seater models: on the rear seats

y7-seater models: on the second-row

seats

For each window-side seating position,

two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

The tether anchorages (upper anchorag-

es) are provided for all the seating posi-

tions of the rear seat (5-seater models)/

second-row seat (7-seater models).

On each outboard rear/second-row seat,

you will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

100515 100516

TOP TETHER

100523

100518

1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

the seatback.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear-

most position.

2. Make the clearance between the seat

cushion and seatback a little wider to lo-

cate the two anchorages (bars) for the po-

sition where you want to install the child

restraint system.

3. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “ ” marks

on the bottom of the seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the adja-

cent seatbelts are not caught.

4. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses teth-

er belts to connect the child restraint sys-

tem properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

5. Connect the top tether hook to the teth-

er anchorage and firmly tighten the tether.

For information on how to set the top teth-

er, read the following “Top tether anchor-

ages”.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

100519

100520

100521

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41

– CONTINUED –

6. Before seating a child in the child re-

straint system, try to move seat back and

forth and left and right to verify that it is

held securely in position.

7. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages (five in the 7-seater

models) so that a child restraint system

having a top tether can be installed in a

rear seating position. When installing a

child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the in-

structions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

TTether anchorage location

VRear seat (5-seater models)/Sec-

ond-row seat (7-seater models)

Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the

right, center and left seats, are already in-

stalled on the back of each seatback.

Open the cover flap to use each anchor-

age.

VThird-row seat (7-seater models)

Two tether anchorages are attached to

the rear edge of the cargo area.

Open the cover flap to use each anchor-

age.

100522

TOP TETHER

100523

TOP TETHER

100524

1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TTo hook the top tether

VRear seat (5-seater models)/Sec-

ond-row seat (7-seater models)

1. Raise the head restraint to the highest

position at the seating position where the

child seat has been installed using the

seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the

head restraint while pressing the release

button.

2. Open the cover flaps to use the an-

chorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

100648

TOP TETHER

100525

100526

When the child restraint system is to

be secured using the top tether,

pass the top tether under the head

restraint between the head restraint

stay posts.

Be sure to install the top tether with

the head restraint raised to the high-

est position. If the head restraint is

in any of the lower positions, the top

tether will touch the head restraint

and the resulting slack will prevent

its secure installation.

100671

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43

– CONTINUED –

VThird-row seat (7-seater models)

1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Open the lid of the cargo area, then re-

move the covers for the anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child

restraint system to the appropriate upper

anchorage.

4. Tighten the top tether securely.

Do not route the top tether over the

head restraint. It may happen that

the top tether cannot be fastened

tightly.

100672

100649

TOP TETHER

100676

100528

100674

1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags

deploys.

Your vehicle’s SRS configu-

ration

The driver’s seat, the front passenger’s

seat, and the outboard seats of the rear/

second seating row of your vehicle are

each provided with, in addition to a lap/

shoulder belt, one or more airbags as fol-

lows:

yFrontal airbag (one each for driver’s

seat and front passenger’s seat)

ySide airbag (one each for driver’s seat

and front passenger’s seat)

yCurtain airbag (one each for the out-

board sides of cabin, extending from driv-

er’s and front passenger’s seats to rear/

second seating row)

Do not pass the top tether under the

head restraint. The top tether will

touch the head restraint and the re-

sulting slack will prevent its secure

installation.

Do not use the top tether with the

head restraint in a raised position,

otherwise the top tether cannot be

fastened tightly.

100673

Prevent the top tether from touching

cargo in the cargo area. The top

tether may become slack if the car-

go changes shape or moves.

100650

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

– CONTINUED –

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-

tensioners” section in this chapter.

yTo obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the driv-

er and all passengers in the vehi-

cle should always wear seatbelts

when the vehicle is moving. The

SRS airbag is designed only as a

supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. It

does not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the

best combined protection in case

of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the ve-

hicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

see the “Seatbelts” section in this

chapter.

yDo not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed – faster than the

blink of an eye – and force to pro-

tect in high speed collisions, the

force of an airbag can injure an

occupant whose body is too close

to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in prop-

er position such as one thrown

forward during pre-accident brak-

ing.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that an

occupant may suffer minor injury

such as abrasions and bruises to

the face or arms because of the

SRS airbag deployment force.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

yDo not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or be-

tween you and the SRS airbag. If

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its prop-

er operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

yPut children aged 12 and under in

a rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are 12

years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from de-

ployment is greater.

100350

Consequently, we strongly rec-

ommend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in a REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

for the child’s age, height and

weight.

Always secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including for-

ward facing child seats) in one of

the rear seating positions recom-

mended in this owner’s manual.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating po-

sitions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, see the “Child restraint sys-

tems” section in this chapter.

yNEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

yNever allow a child to stand up, or

to kneel on the front passenger’s

seat, or never hold a child on your

lap or in your arms. The SRS air-

bag deploys with considerable

force and can injure or even kill

the child.

yWhen the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released. This

smoke could cause breathing

problems for people with a history

of asthma or other breathing trou-

ble. If you or your passengers

have breathing problems after

SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air

promptly.

yA deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47

– CONTINUED –

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

him or her to the applicable section in

this owner’s manual.

1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TComponents

18 19 24 23

100644

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger’s side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10)Airbag wiring (yellow)

11)Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12)Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14)Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15)Curtain airbag module (right side)

16)Curtain airbag module (left side)

17)Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

18)Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)

19)Driver’s seat position sensor

20)Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

21)Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

22)Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

23)Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

24)SRS airbag system warning light

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

– CONTINUED –

Subaru advanced frontal air-

bag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No.

208.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem automatically determines the deploy-

ment force of the driver’s SRS frontal air-

bag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if activat-

ed, the deployment force of the SRS fron-

tal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru

advanced frontal airbag system is a sup-

plemental restraint system and must be

used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags deploy and supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact on the

driver’s and front passenger’s head and

chest.

100261

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

100126

1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can in-

jure or even kill the child.

100125

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space for deployment, the driver

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as possi-

ble and sit upright and well back in

the seat.

100155

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag con-

tacts an occupant not in proper po-

sition such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,

those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

100531

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

– CONTINUED –

TDriver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact, backward-forward adjustment

of the driver’s seat position and whether or

not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.

The backward-forward adjustment of the

driver’s seat position is monitored by the

driver’s seat position sensor under the

driver’s seat.

Whether or not the driver is wearing the

seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt buck-

le switch.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle

switch and/or the seat position sensor to

malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or causing the system to

fail.

yDo not place articles/metal objects or in-

stall any accessory other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the driver’s

seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to kick the driver’s seat or push up its bot-

tom surface with his/her feet.

yDo not place a magnet near the seatbelt

buckle or under the driver’s seat.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the

driver’s seat position sensor have failed,

the SRS airbag system warning light will il-

luminate. Although the driver’s SRS fron-

tal airbag can deploy regardless of the

backward-forward adjustment of the driv-

er’s seat position even when the warning

light is on, have the system inspected by

your SUBARU dealer immediately if the

SRS airbag system warning light comes

on.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS cur-

tain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner

are not controlled by the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system.

TFront passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator op-

erates in different ways depending on the

severity of impact.

The total load on the seat is monitored by

the occupant detection system’s weight

sensor located under the seat.

The system has another sensor that mon-

itors the tension of the front passenger

seatbelt. Using the total seat load and

seatbelt tension data from the sensors,

the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag should or should not be in-

flated.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or cause the system to

fail.

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

100532

1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

yDo not apply any strong impact to the

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.

yDo not spill liquid on the front passen-

ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off im-

mediately.

yDo not disassemble the front passen-

ger’s seat.

yDo not install any accessory (such as

an audio amplifier) other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the front pas-

senger’s seat.

yDo not place anything (shoes, umbrella,

etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

yThe front passenger’s seat must not be

used with the head restraint removed.

yDo not leave any article including a child

restraint system on the front passenger’s

seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehicle.

yDo not place a magnet near the seatbelt

buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. Have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-

diately if the SRS airbag system warning

light comes on.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicle inspected at your

SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,

SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-

sioner are not controlled by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system.

TPassenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the instrument panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi-

cators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag determined by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator will remain extinguished

while the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-

neously even after the system check peri-

od, the system is faulty. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

TConditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not acti-

vated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the fol-

PASS AIR BAG

100533

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53

– CONTINUED –

lowing conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

yThe seat is empty.

yThe seat is equipped with a rearward

facing child restraint system and an infant

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

yThe seat is equipped with a forward fac-

ing child restraint system and a small child

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

yThe seat is equipped with a booster

seat and a small child is in the booster

seat. (See WARNING that follows.)

yThe seat is relieved of the occupant

load for a time exceeding the predeter-

mined monitoring time period.

yThe seat is occupied by a child who has

outgrown a child restraint system (See

WARNING that follows.) or by a small

adult.

yThe front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is faulty.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by a child, observe the following pre-

cautions. Failure to do so may increase

the load on the front passenger’s seat, ac-

tivating the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even though that seat is occupied

by a child.

yDo not place any article on the seat oth-

er than the child occupant and a child re-

straint system.

yDo not place more than one child on the

seat.

yDo not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

yDo not store a heavy load in the seat-

back pocket.

yDo not allow the rear/second-row seat

occupant to place his/her hands or legs on

the front passenger’s seatback, or allow

him/her to pull the seatback.

VIf the front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even

when an infant or a small child is in

a child restraint system (including

booster seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-

tion if the front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indi-

cator extinguishes even when an infant or

a small child is in a child restraint system

(including booster seat). Remove the child

restraint system from the seat. By refer-

ring to the child restraint manufacturer’s

recommendations as well as the child re-

straint system installation procedures in

the “Child restraint systems” section in this

chapter, correctly install the child restraint

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in one of the rear

seating positions recommended in

this owner’s manual in a correct

manner. Also, it is strongly recom-

mended that any forward facing

child seat or booster seat be in-

stalled in one of the rear seating po-

sitions recommended in this own-

er’s manual, and that even children

who have outgrown a child restraint

system be also seated in a REAR

seat. This is because children sit-

ting in the front passenger’s seat

may be killed or severely injured

should the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats

are the safest place for children.

1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

system. Turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

goes out and the OFF indicator comes on.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take

the following actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

the OFF indicator extinguishes after tak-

ing relevant corrective actions described

above, relocate the child restraint system

to one of the rear seating positions recom-

mended in this owner’s manual and imme-

diately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ON indi-

cator illuminates while the OFF indica-

tor extinguishes), take the following

actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in

the seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates

while the OFF indicator extinguishes

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and immedi-

ately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is rec-

ommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child re-

straint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

TConditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon im-

pact when any of the following conditions

is met regarding the front passenger’s

seat.

yWhen the seat is occupied by an adult.

yWhen a heavy article is placed on the

seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat, de-

activating the front passenger’s SRS fron-

tal airbag despite the fact that the seat is

occupied by an adult.

yDo not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion us-

ing his/her feet.

yDo not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

yDo not squeeze any article between the

front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar,

door or center console box. This may lift

the seat cushion.

VIf the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator extinguishes even

when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incorrect-

ly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-

tion. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

– CONTINUED –

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat

to the rearmost position. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF in-

dicator remains illuminated while the ON

indicator remains extinguished, take the

following actions.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF” po-

sition.

yEnsure that there is no article, book,

shoe, or other object trapped under the

seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side

of the seat.

yNext, turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

tinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indi-

cator should illuminate while the OFF indi-

cator remains extinguished.

If the OFF indicator still illuminates while

the ON indicator remains extinguished,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

TEffect vehicle modifications made

for persons with disabilities may

have on Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side

frame, instrument panel, combination

meter, steering wheel, steering column,

tire, suspension or floor panel can affect

the operation of the Subaru advanced air-

bag system. If you have any questions,

you may contact the following Subaru dis-

tributors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Schuman Carriage Motors, Inc.

1234 South Beretania Street, Honolulu, HI

96814

808-592-4497

<Guam>

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066, Tamuning, Guam 96931

671-646-9126

Trebol Subaru of Puerto Rico, Inc.

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

There are currently no Subaru distributors

in any other U.S. territories. If you are in

such an area, please contact the Subaru

distributor or dealer from which you

bought your vehicle.

1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TOperation

1) Driver’s side

2) Passenger’s side

The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem is designed to determine the activa-

tion or deactivation condition of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-

ing on the total load on the front passen-

ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-

ger’s occupant detection system weight

sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the

event of a collision, but this does not mean

failure of the system.

If the front sub sensors inside both front

fenders and the impact sensors in the air-

bag control module detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal col-

lision, the control module sends signals to

the airbag module(s) (only driver’s module

or both driver’s and front passenger’s

modules) instructing the module(s) to in-

flate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driv-

er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bags use dual stage inflators. The two in-

flators of each airbag are triggered either

sequentially or simultaneously, depending

on the severity of impact, backward-for-

ward adjustment of the driver’s seat posi-

tion and fastening/unfastening of the seat-

belt in the case of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag and depending on the severity of

impact and the total load on the seat in the

case of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbag

immediately starts to deflate so that the

driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time

required from detecting impact to the de-

flation of the SRS airbag after deployment

is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s abil-

ity to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These oc-

currences are a normal result of the de-

ployment. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

100534

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

– CONTINUED –

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an acci-

dent involving a moderate to severe fron-

tal collision. It is basically not designed to

deploy in lesser frontal impacts because

the necessary protection can be achieved

by the seatbelt alone. Also, they are basi-

cally not designed to deploy in side or rear

impacts or in roll-over accidents because

deployment of only the driver’s SRS fron-

tal airbag or both driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbags would not

help the occupant in those situations. The

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags are designed to function on a one-

time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle it-

self.

VExamples of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most

likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activat-

ed when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal

impact similar in fashion and magnitude to

the collision described above.

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which it is possible that the driv-

er’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.

The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a re-

sult of deployment.

100535

100536

1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the un-

dercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to de-

ploy.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a telephone pole or

sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load

bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset fron-

tal impact, the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may

not deploy depending on the level of acci-

dent forces involved.

100537

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

– CONTINUED –

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which the driver’s/driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are designed basically not

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its

side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impact-

ed more than once, the driver’s and/or

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are ac-

tivated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

SRS side airbag and SRS cur-

tain airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact colli-

sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted

side of the vehicle deploys between the

occupant and the door panel and supple-

ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact

on the occupant’s chest and waist. The

SRS side airbag operates only for front

seat occupants.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of

the cabin is stored in the roof side (be-

tween the front pillar and a point over the

rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is lo-

cated at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact colli-

sion, the SRS curtain airbag on the im-

pacted side of the vehicle deploys be-

tween the occupant and the side window

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s head.

In a 7-seater model vehicle, the SRS cur-

tain airbag does not operate for third-row

seat occupants.

100538

100539

1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The SRS side airbag and SRS cur-

tain airbag are designed as only a

supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. They

do not do away with the need to fas-

ten seatbelts. It is also important to

wear your seatbelt to help avoid in-

juries that can result when an occu-

pant is not seated in a proper up-

right position.

100164

yDo not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbag is stored in both

front seat seatbacks next to the

door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact collision. However,

the force of SRS side airbag de-

ployment may cause injuries if

your head or other parts of the

body are too close to the SRS side

airbag.

ySince your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. The SRS curtain airbag on

each side of the cabin is stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point over the rear

seat), and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than

the blink of an eye) in the event of

a side impact. However, the force

of its deployment may cause inju-

ries if your head is too close to it.

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side air-

bag deployment.

100165

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61

– CONTINUED –

100166

100167

yNever allow a child to kneel on the

front passenger’s seat facing the

side window or to wrap his/her

arms around the front seat seat-

back. In the event of an accident,

the force of the SRS side airbag

deployment could injure the child

seriously because his/her head or

arms or other parts of the body

are too close to the SRS side air-

bag.

Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag, children aged

12 and under should be placed in

a rear seat anyway and should be

properly restrained at all times.

yNever allow a child to kneel on any

passenger’s seat facing the side

window. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the SRS curtain

airbag deployment could injure

the child seriously because his/

her head is close to the SRS cur-

tain airbag.

yDo not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of the SRS side airbag de-

ployment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

100168

1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TOperation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-

bag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags and SRS curtain airbags de-

yDo not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to a

front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near a

deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location

could be propelled through the

cabin with great force by the cur-

tain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

600516

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by pre-

venting deployment of the curtain

airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

100280

Do not put any kind of cover or

clothes or other objects over either

front seatback and do not attach la-

bels or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side airbag.

They could prevent proper deploy-

ment of the SRS side airbag, reduc-

ing protection available to the front

seat’s occupant.

100281

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63

– CONTINUED –

ploy independently of each other since

each has its own impact sensor. There-

fore, they may not both deploy in the same

accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag deploys independently

of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags in the steering wheel and

instrument panel.

An impact sensor is located in each of the

left and right center pillars and rear wheel

houses. If a center pillar impact sensor

senses an impact force above a predeter-

mined level in a side collision, the control

module causes both the SRS side airbag

and curtain airbag on the impacted side to

inflate regardless of whether the rear

wheel house impact sensor on the same

side senses an impact. If it is a rear wheel

house impact sensor alone that senses a

sufficiently strong impact force, the control

module causes only the SRS curtain air-

bag on the impacted side to inflate. After

deployment, the SRS side airbag immedi-

ately starts to deflate. The time required

from detection of an impact to deflation of

an SRS side airbag after deployment is

shorter than the blink of an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-

bag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS cur-

tain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud in-

flation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occurrenc-

es are a normal result of the deployment.

This smoke does not indicate a fire in the

vehicle.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-

bag are designed to deploy in the event of

an accident involving a moderate to se-

vere side impact collision. It is basically

not designed to deploy in a lesser side im-

pact. Also, it is basically not designed to

deploy in frontal or rear impacts because

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment would not help the occupant

in those situations.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed to function on a one-

time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle it-

self.

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part

of the roof side over the rear seat).

Doing so can cause burns because

the components can be very hot as

a result of deployment.

1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VExample of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag will most likely de-

ploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag.

200320

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65

– CONTINUED –

VExamples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS cur-

tain airbag are unlikely to deploy.

100540

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity

of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole

or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-

ment. In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which the SRS side airbag and

SRS curtain airbag will basically not

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air-

bag are basically not designed to deploy if

the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision

or is struck from behind. Examples of such

accidents are illustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side im-

pact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS

airbag system warning light “AIRBAG” will

show normal system operation by lighting

for approximately 6 seconds when the ig-

nition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

yFront sub sensor (Right-hand side)

100541

100563 100385

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-67

– CONTINUED –

yFront sub sensor (Left-hand side)

yAirbag control module (including impact

sensors)

yFrontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

yFrontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

ySide airbag module (Driver’s side)

ySide airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

yCurtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house right-hand side)

yCurtain airbag sensor (Rear wheel

house left-hand side)

yCurtain airbag module (Right side)

yCurtain airbag module (Left side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

yDriver’s seat position sensor

yFront passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

control module

yFront passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

yAll related wiring

SRS airbag system servicing

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi-

nor collision or not inflate in a se-

vere collision), which may increase

the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

yWhen discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehicle

damaged by a collision, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

yThe SRS airbag has no user-ser-

viceable parts. Do not use electri-

cal test equipment on any circuit

related to the SRS airbag system.

For required servicing of the SRS

airbag, see your nearest SUBARU

dealer. Tampering with or discon-

necting the system’s wiring could

result in accidental inflation of the

SRS airbag or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, which may result

in serious injury. The wiring har-

nesses of the SRS airbag system

are covered with yellow insulation

and system connectors are yellow

for easy identification.

1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

In the event that the SRS airbag is de-

ployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer. When the com-

ponents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

yThe front part of the vehicle was in-

volved in an accident in which the only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

yThe pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

yEither center pillar and rear wheel

house or a nearby area of the vehicle

was involved in an accident in which

the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag did not deploy.

yThe fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

Precautions against vehicle

modification

If you need service or repair in areas

listed in the following, have an au-

thorized SUBARU dealer perform

the work. The SRS airbag control

module, impact sensors and airbag

modules are stored in these areas.

yUnder the center console

yInside each front fender

ySteering wheel and column and

nearby areas

yTop of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby ar-

eas

yEach front seat and nearby area

yInside each center pillar

yIn each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

yBetween the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

yTo avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may result

in serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any compo-

nents or wiring of the SRS airbag

system.

This includes following modifica-

tions:

yInstallation of custom steering

wheels

yAttachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

yInstallation of custom seats

yReplacement of seat fabric or

leather

yInstallation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-69

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

yAttachment of a hands-free mi-

crophone or any other accesso-

ry to a front pillar, a center pillar,

a rear pillar, the windshield, a

side window, an assist grip, or

any other cabin surface that

would be near a deploying SRS

curtain airbag.

yInstallation of additional electri-

cal/electronic equipment such

as a mobile two-way radio on or

near the SRS airbag system

components and/or wiring is

not advisable. This could inter-

fere with proper operation of the

SRS airbag system.

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

yAttachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts.

yModification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

yInstallation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle plac-

ard attached to the driver’s door

pillar or specified for individual

vehicle models in this Owner’s

Manual.

yAttachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Keys and doors

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2

Key number ............................................................. 2-2

Immobilizer ......................................................... 2-3

Security ID plate ..................................................... 2-3

Security indicator light ........................................... 2-4

Key replacement ..................................................... 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the outside ............. 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5

Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6

Power door locking switches ............................ 2-6

Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-7

Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-8

Locking the doors .................................................. 2-9

Unlocking the doors ............................................... 2-9

Unlocking the rear gate .......................................... 2-9

Illuminated entry ..................................................... 2-9

Vehicle finder function ........................................... 2-10

Sounding a panic alarm ......................................... 2-10

Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-10

Replacing the battery ............................................. 2-10

Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-11

Alarm system ...................................................... 2-14

System alarm operation ......................................... 2-14

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ................................................................... 2-15

Arming the system ................................................. 2-15

Disarming the system ............................................ 2-16

Valet mode ............................................................... 2-17

Passive arming ....................................................... 2-17

Tripped sensor identification ................................ 2-18

Shock sensors (dealer option) .............................. 2-18

Child safety locks ............................................... 2-19

Windows .............................................................. 2-19

Power windows ....................................................... 2-19

Rear gate ............................................................. 2-22

Moonroof ............................................................. 2-23

Tilt function ............................................................. 2-24

Sliding function ....................................................... 2-24

Anti-entrapment function ....................................... 2-24

Sun shades .............................................................. 2-25

2-2 Keys and doors

Keys and doors

Keys

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

5) Security ID plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle.

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all

locks on your vehicle.

yIgnition switch

yDriver’s door

yGlove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door locks. You can keep the glove

box locked when you leave your vehicle

and valet key at a parking facility.

Key number

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle.

For information on making replacement

keys for vehicles with the immobilizer sys-

tem, refer to the “Immobilizer” section in

this chapter.

5321

200700

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the ON position to the

ACC or OFF position, thereby stop-

ping the engine.

200701

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

can be used to operate your vehicle. Even

if an unregistered key fits into the ignition

switch and can be turned to the “START”

position, the engine will automatically stop

after several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a tran-

sponder in which the key’s ID code is

stored. When a key is inserted into the ig-

nition switch and turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, the transponder transmits the key’s

ID code to the immobilizer system’s re-

ceiver. If the transmitted ID code matches

the ID code registered in the immobilizer

system, the system allows the engine to

be started. Since the ID code is transmit-

ted and acted upon almost instantly, the

immobilizer system does not impede nor-

mal starting of the engine.

If the engine fails to start, pull out the key

once before trying again. (Refer to the “Ig-

nition switch” section [chapter 3].)

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In-

dustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

yNever leave your vehicle unattended

with its keys inside.

yBefore leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and rear

gate.

yDo not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the vehi-

cle.

Security ID plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write

down the security ID and keep it in another

safe place, not in the vehicle. This number

is needed to make a replacement key if

you lose your key or lock it inside the vehi-

cle.

This number is also needed for replace-

ment or repair of the engine control unit,

integrated unit, and combination meter.

yDo not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

yDo not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

200701

2-4 Keys and doors

Security indicator light

The security indicator light deters potential

thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

equipped with an immobilizer system. It

begins flashing approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-

sition or immediately after the key is pulled

out.

If the security indicator light does not

flash, the immobilizer system may be

faulty. If this occurs, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.

an imitation key), the security indicator

light comes on.

NOTE

Even if the security indicator light

flashes irregularly or its fuse blows

(the light does not flash if its fuse is

blown), the immobilizer system will

function normally.

Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a re-

placement key made. Any new key must

be registered for use with your vehicle’s

immobilizer system before it can be used.

Up to four keys can be registered for use

with one vehicle.

For security, all the keys registered with

your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

have their ID codes erased and re-regis-

tered when a new key is made. Therefore,

all of your vehicle’s keys must be present-

ed when a new key is registered. Any key

that is not re-registered when a new key is

made cannot be used after the other keys

are re-registered. For information on re-

placement keys and on the registration of

keys with your immobilizer system, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

Door locks

Locking and unlocking from

the outside

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the front.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward

the rear.

Lift the outside door handle to open an un-

locked door.

200702

200703

Keys and doors 2-5

– CONTINUED –

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and

then close the door.

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the “ ”

sides of the switch and then close the

door. In this case, all closed doors and the

rear gate are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

Locking and unlocking from

the inside

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward.

200704

200705

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of be-

ing thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from un-

expectedly opening doors and en-

tering your vehicle.

200706

2-6 Keys and doors

To unlock the door from the inside, rotate

the lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an un-

locked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed and locked before

starting to drive.

Battery drainage prevention

function

When a door or the rear gate is not com-

pletely closed and the map light, dome

light, ignition switch light, and door open

warning light remain illuminated as a re-

sult, the lights are automatically turned off

by the battery drainage prevention func-

tion after 10 minutes of illumination to pre-

vent the battery from going dead. The op-

erational/non-operational setting of this

function can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU

dealer if you would like to change the set-

ting.

NOTE

yWhen leaving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors and the rear

gate are completely closed.

yThe battery drainage prevention

function does not operate while the key

is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

Driver’s switch

1) Lock

2) Unlock

200707

200708

Keys and doors 2-7

Front passenger’s switch

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked by the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock all doors (including the rear gate),

push the “ ” side of the switch.

To unlock all doors (including the rear

gate), push the “ ” side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the pow-

er door locking switches.

Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from be-

ing locked with the key still in the ignition

switch.

TBehavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operative

With either the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door open, the doors automatically

remain unlocked even if the “ ” side of

the door locking switch is pushed.

TBehavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operative

yIf the lock lever is turned to the rear

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the driv-

er’s door is locked.

yIf the spare key is used to lock the driv-

er’s door from the outside of the vehicle,

the door is locked.

yIt is possible to lock the all doors and the

rear gate by holding the “ ” side of the

door locking switch pushed for three sec-

onds with the driver’s door open and then

closing the driver’s door.

This function’s operative/non-operative

setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

NOTE

When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

200709

2-8 Keys and doors

Remote keyless entry sys-

tem

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In-

dustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Two transmitters are provided for your ve-

hicle.

The keyless entry system has the follow-

ing functions.

yLocking and unlocking the doors (and

rear gate) without a key

yUnlocking the rear gate without key

ySounding a panic alarm

yArming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. See the next section “Alarm system”

for detailed information.

The operable distance of the keyless entry

system is approximately 30 feet (10

meters). However, this distance will vary

depending on environmental conditions.

The system’s operable distance will be

shorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio waves

such as a power plant, broadcast station,

TV tower, or remote controller of home

electronic appliances.

The keyless entry system does not oper-

ate when the key is inserted in the ignition

switch.

: Rear gate unlock button

: Unlock/disarm button

: Lock/arm button

A: Panic button

1) Front

2) Back

yDo not expose the transmitter to

severe shocks, such as those ex-

perienced as a result of dropping

or throwing.

yDo not take the transmitter apart

except when replacing the bat-

tery.

yDo not get the transmitter wet. If it

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

200898

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

Locking the doors

Press the “ ” button to lock all doors

and rear gate. An electronic chirp will

sound once and the turn signal lights will

flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound

five times and the turn signal lights will

flash five times to alert you that the doors

(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock and then an electronic chirp will

sound once and the turn signal lights will

flash once.

Unlocking the doors

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driv-

er’s door. An electronic chirp will sound

twice and the turn signal lights will flash

twice. To unlock all doors and the rear

gate, briefly press the “ ” button a

second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and sec-

ond presses of the “ ” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

Unlocking the rear gate

Pressing the “ ” button opens the

rear gate.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and

the turn signal lights will flash twice.

Illuminated entry

The interior (map, dome and cargo area)

light will illuminate when the “ ” button

is pressed. This light stays illuminated for

approximately 30 seconds if any of the

doors or the rear gate is not opened.

If the “ ” button is pressed before 30

seconds have elapsed, this light will go

out.

To activate this function, set the following

interior light switches to the indicated po-

sitions:

200899 200900 200901

2-10 Keys and doors

Map light: OFF position

Dome light: Middle position

Cargo area light: DOOR position

A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-

nation period setting of the interior light in

accordance with your preference. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30

feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing

the “ ” button three times in a five-sec-

ond period will cause your vehicle’s horn

to sound once and its turn signal lights to

flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “ ” button

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

Sounding a panic alarm

A “PANIC” button is located on the back of

the transmitter.

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the turn signal

lights will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. Unless a

button on the remote is pressed, the alarm

will be deactivated after approximately 30

seconds.

Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same steps

to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

power door locking switch.

3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch, pull

the key out and re-insert it into the ignition

switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds

after Step 2.

4. While still holding down the UNLOCK

side of the power door locking switch,

open and close the driver’s door once

within 10 seconds after Step 3.

5. The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer.

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter battery begins to get

weak, transmitter range will begin to de-

200714

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or

in the transmitter when replacing

the battery.

Keys and doors 2-11

– CONTINUED –

crease. Replace the battery as soon as

possible.

To replace the battery:

1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Remove the old battery from the hold-

er.

1) Negative (–) side facing up

3. Replace with a new battery (Type

CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to in-

stall the new battery with the negative (–)

side facing up.

4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-

ter case.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

keyless entry system’s control unit.

Press either the “ ” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to pur-

chase additional transmitters (up to four

can be programmed), you should re-pro-

gram all of your transmitters for security

reasons. It is recommended that you have

your dealer program all of your transmit-

ters into your system.

TProgramming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped with

a special code learning feature that allows

you to program new transmitter codes into

the system or to delete old ones. The sys-

tem can learn up to four unique transmitter

codes. The four transmitter codes may be

the same or different.

Programming transmitter codes into

system:

Bag containing transmitter

200715

200716

200717

200718

2-12 Keys and doors

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the key-

less entry system, it is necessary to pro-

gram the transmitter’s code (identification

number) into the system. A label showing

the code is affixed to the bag containing

the transmitter, and another is affixed to

the circuit board inside the transmitter. If

there is no bag, open the transmitter case

and make a note of the eight-digit number.

Program the number into the system in

accordance with the following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

gate or trunk lid.

2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the driv-

er’s seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds.

1)Open and close the driver’s door

once.

1) LOCK

2) ON

2)Insert the key into the ignition switch,

then turn it from the “LOCK” position to

the “ON” position 10 times within 15

seconds.

NOTE

yWhen you complete step 2), an elec-

tronic tone will sound once, a buzzer

will continue to sound and the interior

light will continue to flash until the

transmitter codes are completely regis-

tered.

yIf you do not perform steps 1) and 2)

within 45 seconds, an error will occur.

Neither an electronic tone nor the buzz-

er will sound, and the interior lamp will

not flash. In this event, perform the

whole procedure again beginning with

part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds.

NOTE

yWhen part 4 of the procedure is com-

pleted, an electronic tone will sound

for 30 seconds.

yIf you do not perform the operations

in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error

will occur and the electronic tone will

not sound. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

200719 200720

200721

Keys and doors 2-13

– CONTINUED –

5. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, push the “ ” side of the power door

locking switch the same number of times

as the leftmost digit of the transmitter

code. For example, push the locking

switch eight times if the leftmost digit of

the code is 8.

NOTE

yThe electronic tone will stop sound-

ing when you start entering the num-

ber.

yIf you do not start entering the num-

ber using the lock knob before the

electronic tone stops sounding, an er-

ror will occur. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

yIf the interval between one push of

the knob and the next exceeds five sec-

onds, an error will occur. In this event,

perform the procedure again beginning

with part 4. If an error occurs six times,

perform the procedure again starting

with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering the

number, push the “ ” side of the lock-

ing switch within five seconds.

NOTE

yAn electronic tone will sound.

yIf you push the “ ” side of the

locking switch when more than five

seconds have passed, an error will oc-

cur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 4. If an

error occurs six times, perform the pro-

cedure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the

transmitter code beginning with the sec-

ond digit (counting from the left) and fin-

ishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE

yWhen you finish entering the eighth

digit, an electronic tone will sound for

30 seconds.

yIf the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds five

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again be-

ginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, use the power door locking switch to

again enter the transmitter code beginning

with leftmost digit.

NOTE

If you do not start entering the number

using the lock knob before the elec-

tronic tone stops sounding, an error

will occur. In this event, perform the

procedure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will

sound for one second and automatic door

locking and unlocking operation will take

200722

200723

2-14 Keys and doors

place once to indicate completion of regis-

tration, provided the code entered the sec-

ond time is identical to that entered the

first time.

NOTE

If the code entered the second time is

not identical to the code entered the

first time, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again be-

ginning with part 5. If an error occurs

five times, perform the procedure

again starting with part 3.

10.If you wish to program another trans-

mitter code into the system (up to four

transmitter codes can be programmed

into the system), perform the procedure

beginning with part 4. When you have fin-

ished programming all of the necessary

transmitter codes into the system, remove

the key from the ignition switch.

11.Test every registered transmitter to

confirm correct operation.

TDeleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the keyless entry sys-

tem has four memory locations to store

transmitter codes, giving it the ability to

operate with up to four transmitters. When

you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-

ter’s code remains in the memory. For se-

curity reasons, lost transmitter codes

should be deleted from the memory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program

four transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,

program it four times. If you have two cur-

rent transmitters, program each one twice.

If you have three current transmitters, pro-

gram two of them once and the third one

twice. This process will leave only current

transmitter codes in the system’s memory.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating

their keyless entry system within range

of your vehicle when programming

transmitters. If someone else were to

operate their remote transmitter while

you are programming your transmit-

ters, it is possible that their transmitter

code will be programmed into your

system, allowing them unauthorized

access to your vehicle.

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the turn signal lights flash if

someone attempts to break into your vehi-

cle.

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for de-

activation yourself or have it done by your

SUBARU dealer.

System alarm operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarms when triggered:

yThe vehicle’s horn will sound and the

turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.

yIf any door (or the rear gate) remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door (or the rear gate) is

closed while the horn is sounding, the

horn will stop sounding with a delay of up

to 30 seconds.

The alarm is triggered by:

Keys and doors 2-15

– CONTINUED –

yOpening a door or the rear gate

yPhysical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only vehicles with shock sen-

sors (dealer option))

Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Disarm-

ing the system” in this section).

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors (and the rear gate).

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition.

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1 sec-

ond, and wait 10 seconds without releas-

ing the switch. The setting will then be

changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice, indi-

cating that the system is now deactivated.

If the system was previously deactivated:

The odometer/trip meter screen displays

“AL on” and the horn sounds once, indi-

cating that the system is now activated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

TTo stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

yPress any button on the remote trans-

mitter.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition.

Arming the system

TTo arm the system using remote

transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors (and the rear gate).

: Press to Arm the system.

: Press to Disarm the system.

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than two seconds). All doors (and the rear

gate) will lock, an electronic chirp will

200918

200702

2-16 Keys and doors

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the indicator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every two seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

If any of the doors, (or the rear gate) is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds

five times, the turn signal lights flash five

times to alert you that the doors (or the

rear gate) are not properly closed. When

you close the door, the system will auto-

matically arm and doors will automatically

lock.

TTo arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors and the rear gate but

leave only the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator light will start flash-

ing slowly (approximately once every two

seconds) to inform you that the system

has armed.

NOTE

yThe system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroofs are opened. Always make

sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

yThe 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

yThe system is in the standby mode

for a 30-second period after locking the

doors with the remote transmitter. The

security indicator light will flash at

short intervals during this period.

yIf any of the following actions is done

during the standby period, the system

will not switch to the surveillance state.

yDoors are unlocked using the re-

mote transmitter.

yAny door (including the rear gate)

is opened.

yIgnition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

Disarming the system

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than two seconds) on the remote transmit-

ter. The driver’s door will unlock, an elec-

tronic chirp will sound twice, the turn sig-

nal lights will flash twice and the indicator

light will go off.

To unlock all other doors and the rear

gate, briefly press the “ ” button a

second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and sec-

ond presses of the “ ” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

200705

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

tem may not respond.

TEmergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, bro-

ken or the transmitter battery is too weak),

you can disarm the system without using

the transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn

the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the

“ON” position with a registered key.

Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the set-

ting of your vehicle’s alarm system for de-

activation mode. (Refer to “Activating and

deactivating the alarm system” in this sec-

tion.) The security indicator light will con-

tinue to flash once every three seconds in-

dicating that the system is in the valet

mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” in this section.)

Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

TTo enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

dealer.

TArming the system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition.

1) LOCK

2) ON

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

In passive mode, the system will au-

tomatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors you

must either lock them as indicated

in step 4 below or with the key once

they have been closed. Failure to

lock the doors manually will result

in a higher security risk.

200721

2-18 Keys and doors

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will auto-

matically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the remote transmitter or power door lock-

ing switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm-

ing will take place immediately regardless

of whether or not the passive mode has

been selected.

TDisarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

“ ” button on the transmitter.

Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered. Al-

so, the number of flashes indicates the lo-

cation of unauthorized intrusion or the se-

verity of impact on the vehicle.

yWhen the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indicator light will light

for 1 second and then flash as follows:

When a door or rear gate was opened:

5 times

When the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON” position by using a key not reg-

istered with your immobilizer system: 3

times

When a strong impact or multiple im-

pacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles

with shock sensors (dealer option))

When a light impact was sensed: once

(only vehicles with shock sensors (deal-

er option))

Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm sys-

tem when they sense impacts applied to

the vehicle and when any of their electric

wires is cut. The alarm system causes the

horn to sound and the turn signal lights to

flash for a short time when the sensed im-

pact is weak, but it warns of a strong im-

pact or multiple impacts by sounding the

horn and flashing the turn signal lights,

both lasting approximately 30 seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

NOTE

yThe shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by

breaking in, and cannot sense an im-

pact that does not cause vibration

(such as breaking the glass using a

rescue hammer).

yThe shock sensors may sense vibra-

tion like those shown in the following

and trigger the alarm system. Select

the settings of the alarm system and

shock sensors appropriately depend-

ing on where you usually park your ve-

hicle.

Example:

Vibration from construction site

Vibration in multistory car park

Vibration from trains

yYou can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your prefer-

ence by your SUBARU dealer.

200704

Keys and doors 2-19

– CONTINUED –

Child safety locks

Each rear door has a child safety lock that

prevents the doors from being opened

even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside regardless of the position of

the inner door handle lock lever. The door

can only be opened from the outside.

Windows

Power windows

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

TDriver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left passenger’s window

5) For rear right passenger’s window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

Always use the child safety lock

whenever a child rides in the rear.

Serious injury could result if a child

accidentally opened the door and

fell out.

LOCK

200726

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must do

the following.

yWhen operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to pre-

vent anyone’s fingers, arms, neck

or head from being caught in the

window.

yAlways lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child operating the power win-

dow.

200727

2-20 Keys and doors

VOperating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto

down feature that allows the window to be

opened fully without holding the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and re-

lease it, and the window will fully open. To

stop the window halfway, pull the switch

up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

held.

VOperating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, push

the appropriate switch down and hold it

until the window reaches the desired posi-

tion.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until it reaches the desired po-

sition.

200728

200729

200730

200731

Keys and doors 2-21

VLocking the passengers’ windows

To lock the passengers’ windows, push

the lock switch. When the lock switch is in

the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ win-

dows cannot be opened or closed.

Press the switch again to cancel the pas-

sengers’ window locking.

NOTE

When the lock switch is pushed to the

“LOCK” position, the indicator lights in

the passenger’s window switches (in-

cluded in the power window switch

cluster on the driver’s door) all go out.

TPassengers’ side switches

Front passenger’s window switch

1) Open

2) Close

To open the window, push the switch

down and hold it until the window reaches

the desired position.

Rear passengers’ window switches

1) Open

2) Close

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

When the lock switch on the power win-

dow switch cluster, located on the driver’s

side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the

passengers’ windows cannot be operated

with the passengers’ switches.

200732

200733

200734

2-22 Keys and doors

Rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using either the keyless entry system or

the power door locking switch.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches”

and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-

tions in this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear

gate lock then push the button.

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and

push down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull it down holding the recessed grip.

1) Reflectors

200735

yTo prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle, al-

ways keep the rear gate closed

while driving.

yDo not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the recessed

grip from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand be-

ing caught and injured.

200736

When the rear gate is open, do not

place a heavy item on either reflec-

tor. Also, do not sit on either reflec-

tor. Doing so could break the reflec-

tor.

200894

Keys and doors 2-23

– CONTINUED –

NOTE

Should the rear gate be unable to be

unlocked due to a discharged battery,

a fault in the door locking/unlocking

system or other causes, you can un-

lock it by manually operating the rear

gate lock release lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be unlocked”

section in chapter 9.

Moonroof

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” position.

yDo not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

yBe careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading cargo.

yNever let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if the vehicle

stops suddenly or turns sharply

or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

yBefore closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will be

accidentally caught in the moon-

roof.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child operating the moonroof.

yNever try to check the anti-entrap-

ment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

yDo not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

yDo not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

yThe anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

2-24 Keys and doors

Tilt function

1) Tilt up

2) Tilt down

The tilting function will only operate when

the moonroof is fully closed.

Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to

raise the moonroof.

Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to

lower the moonroof.

Release the switch after the moonroof has

been raised or has been lowered com-

pletely. Pushing the switch continuously

may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE

One-touch operation does not take

place when the moonroof is tilted up

and down. Push the switch continu-

ously to tilt the moonroof up and down.

Sliding function

1) Open

2) Close

Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to

open the moonroof. The sun shade will

also be opened together with the moon-

roof.

Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to

close the moonroof. The moonroof will

stop halfway if you continue to press on

the switch. Release the switch once and

push it again to close the moonroof com-

pletely.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-

way position while opening or closing it,

momentarily push the switch to the

“OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to open-

ing the moonroof to prevent drops of water

from falling into the passenger compart-

ment.

Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehi-

cle’s roof during closure, it automatically

moves back to either of the following posi-

tions according to the point at which it

senses the object:

yWhen the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop posi-

tion and fully closed position, it moves

back to the halfway stop position and

stops there.

yWhen the moonroof senses the object

at a point between the halfway stop posi-

tion and fully open position, it moves back

to the fully open position and stops there.

The anti-entrapment function may also be

activated by a strong shock on the moon-

roof even when there is nothing trapped.

NOTE

For the sake of safety, it is recommend-

ed that you avoid driving with the

200737

200738

Keys and doors 2-25

moonroof fully opened.

Sun shades

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

200739

Instruments and controls

Ignition switch .................................................... 3-3

LOCK ....................................................................... 3-3

ACC .......................................................................... 3-3

ON ............................................................................ 3-4

START ...................................................................... 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-4

Ignition switch light ................................................ 3-4

Hazard warning flasher ...................................... 3-5

Meters and gauges ............................................. 3-5

Combination meter illumination ............................ 3-5

Canceling the function for meter needle/gauge

movement and combination meter sequential

illumination upon turning on the ignition

switch .................................................................... 3-5

Speedometer ........................................................... 3-6

Odometer ................................................................. 3-6

Double trip meter .................................................... 3-7

Tachometer ............................................................. 3-7

Fuel gauge ............................................................... 3-8

Temperature gauge ................................................ 3-8

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-9

Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 3-10

SRS airbag system warning light .......................... 3-11

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators .............................................................. 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ....................................................... 3-12

Charge warning light............................................... 3-13

Oil pressure warning light ..................................... 3-13

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light ....................... 3-13

Rear differential oil temperature warning light .... 3-14

Low tire pressure warning light ............................ 3-14

ABS warning light ................................................... 3-15

Brake system warning light ................................... 3-16

Low fuel warning light ..................................... 3-17

Door open warning light ........................................ 3-17

Windshield washer fluid warning light ................. 3-17

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................ 3-17

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light ........................................................................ 3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Traction

Control system OFF indicator light .................... 3-18

Security indicator light ........................................... 3-19

SPORT mode indicator light .................................. 3-19

Selector lever/Gear position indicator .................. 3-20

Turn signal indicator lights .................................... 3-20

High beam indicator light ....................................... 3-20

Cruise control indicator light ................................. 3-20

Cruise control set indicator light .......................... 3-20

Headlight indicator light ......................................... 3-20

Front fog light indicator light ................................. 3-20

Clock .................................................................... 3-21

Outside temperature indication ........................ 3-21

Multi function display (Vehicle without

Navigation System) ......................................... 3-23

Current fuel consumption ...................................... 3-23

Average fuel consumption ..................................... 3-23

Driving range on remaining fuel ............................ 3-24

Journey time ........................................................... 3-25

Instruments and controls

Light control switch ........................................... 3-26

Headlights ............................................................... 3-26

High/low beam change (dimmer) .......................... 3-26

Headlight flasher .................................................... 3-26

Daytime running light system ............................... 3-27

Turn signal lever ................................................. 3-27

Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-27

Parking light switch ........................................... 3-28

Front fog light switch ......................................... 3-28

Wiper and washer ............................................... 3-29

Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-30

Rear window wiper and washer switch ................ 3-32

Windshield wiper deicer .................................... 3-32

Rear window defogger button ........................... 3-33

Mirrors ................................................................. 3-34

Inside mirror ........................................................... 3-34

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ...... 3-34

Outside mirrors ....................................................... 3-36

Tilt steering wheel .............................................. 3-37

Horn ..................................................................... 3-37

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

Instrumen ts and control s

Ignition switch

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

yKeep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

yUsing electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

If the ignition switch will not move from

the “LOCK” position to the “ACC” po-

sition, turn the steering wheel slightly

to the left and right as you turn the ig-

nition switch.

yIf the key is attached to a keyholder

or to a large bunch of other keys, cen-

trifugal force may act on it as the vehi-

cle moves, resulting in unwanted turn-

ing of the ignition switch. Also, if a

large keyholder is attached to the key,

your knees or hands may accidentally

touch it in a way that turns the ignition

switch.

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the steer-

ing wheel slightly to the right and left as

you turn the key.

The key can be turned from “ACC” to

“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in

the “P” position.

ACC

In this position the electrical accessories

yNever turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is being

driven or towed because that will

lock the steering wheel, prevent-

ing steering control. And when

the engine is turned off, it takes a

much greater effort than usual to

steer.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child or others. Children could

operate the power windows, the

sunroof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

300500

300501

3-4 Instruments and controls

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

START

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

If your registered key fails to start the en-

gine, pull out the key once (the security in-

dicator light will blink), and then insert the

key in the ignition switch and turn it to the

“START” position and again try to start the

engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

yThe key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

yThe key is near another key that con-

tains an immobilizer transponder.

Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime

stops when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light comes on

when any of the doors are opened. The

light remains on for a several seconds and

gradually goes out after all doors are

closed or if the key is inserted in the igni-

tion switch.

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

300502

300503

Instruments and controls 3-5

– CONTINUED –

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the in-

strument panel. To turn off the flasher,

push the button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Liquid-crystal displays are used in

some of the meters and gauges in the

combination meter. You will find their

indications hard to see if you wear po-

larized glasses.

Combination meter illumina-

tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the various parts of the

combination meter are illuminated in the

following sequence:

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,

and gauge back lights illuminate.

2. Meter needles and gauges each show

MAX reading.

3. Meter needles and gauges each show

MIN reading.

4. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.

5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

Canceling the function for

meter needle/gauge move-

ment and combination meter

sequential illumination upon

turning on the ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate the

movement of the meter needles and

gauges and sequential illumination of the

combination meter that takes place when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-

sition.

Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi-

tion. With the A trip meter indication se-

lected, briefly press the trip knob twice.

You can now establish the activated/deac-

tivated setting for movement of the meter

needles and gauges when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. To

300504

300185

3-6 Instruments and controls

change the current setting, press the trip

knob for at least two seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

With the function deactivated, the combi-

nation meter illuminates as follows:

1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter

rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,

and gauge back lights illuminate.

2. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.

3. Regular illumination (for driving) be-

gins.

Briefly press the trip knob again. You can

now establish the activated/deactivated

setting for sequential illumination of the

combination meter when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. To

change the current setting, press the trip

knob for at least two seconds.

: Activated

: Deactivated

Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip

meter indication.

If you turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, or open and close the

driver’s door during the setting procedure,

the new setting will be canceled.

Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a

period of 10 seconds, the new setting will

be canceled.

NOTE

yIt is not possible to cancel sequential

illumination of the combination meter

while sequential illumination is actual-

ly taking place. Cancel sequential illu-

mination when regular illumination (for

driving) has begun.

yWhen you open the driver’s door

with the ignition switch in the “LOCK”

position, the meters’ needles and rims

are lit. The illumination stops working

when you shut the driver’s door or au-

tomatically after 30 seconds.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

Odometer

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC”

or “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you

do not press the trip knob within 10 sec-

onds of illumination of the odometer/trip

meter, the odometer/trip meter will go off.

The odometer/trip meter will also go off if

300543

300261

Instruments and controls 3-7

– CONTINUED –

you open and close the driver’s door with-

in 10 seconds of illumination of the odom-

eter/trip meter.

Double trip meter

This meter display two trip meters when

the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC”

or “ON” position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly

push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the mode

indication alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than

2 seconds.

If you press the trip knob when the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. It is pos-

sible to switch between the A trip meter

and B trip meter indications while the

odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not

press the trip knob within 10 seconds of il-

lumination of the odometer/trip meter, the

odometer/trip meter will go off. Also, if you

open and close the driver’s door within 10

seconds of illumination of the odometer/

trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will go

off.

NOTE

If the connection between the combi-

nation meter and battery is broken for

any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or fuse replacement, the data re-

corded on the trip meter will be lost.

TVehicle communication system

fault indication

The vehicle communication system car-

ries various types of information (vehicle

speed, running conditions, etc.) to control

modules. In the event of a fault in this

communication system, the trip meter will

show “ ”.

If the trip meter shows “ ”, immedi-

ately contact the nearest SUBARU dealer

and have the vehicle communication sys-

tem inspected.

NOTE

If you press the trip knob while the trip

meter is showing “ ”, the trip

meter indication will appear for 10 sec-

onds.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

300258

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

A trip meter

B trip meter

3-8 Instruments and controls

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev-

el movement in the tank.

If you press the trip knob while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,

the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you

(a) do not press the trip knob for 10 sec-

onds or (b) open and close the driver’s

door, the fuel gauge indication will go off.

TLow fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [Approximately

2.6 US gal (10 liters, 2.2 Imp gal)].

It only operates when the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in ac-

cordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine

speed is reduced below the red

zone.

300542

200253

300541

Instruments and controls 3-9

– CONTINUED –

reaches near the middle of the range. En-

gine operation is optimum with the engine

coolant at this temperature range and high

revving operation when the engine is not

warmed up enough should be avoided.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

come on momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position. The fol-

lowing lights come on:

: Driver’s seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light goes out only

when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warn-

ing light (The seatbelt warning light goes

out only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL temperature warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Traction Control system OFF indica-

tor light

/ : Brake system warning light

: AWD warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light

: SPORT mode indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

: Low fuel warning light

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the ve-

hicle as soon as possible.

See the “In case of emergency” in

chapter 9.

3-10 Instruments and controls

: Rear differential oil temperature

warning light

: Windshield washer fluid warning

light

: Door open warning light

: Security indicator light

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver

and front passenger to fasten their seat-

belts by illuminating the warning lights in

the locations indicated in the following il-

lustrations and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

TOperation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-

sition, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the seat-

belt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s and/or front passenger’s

seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened 6 sec-

onds later, both warning lights or the

warning light for the unfastened seatbelt

will remain lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/is

still not fastened even 15 seconds later

(21 seconds after turning ON the ignition

switch), the warning lights will alternate

between flashing and steady illumination

at 15-second intervals, and the chime will

sound while the warning light(s) is/are

flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until both driver and

front passenger fasten their seatbelts.

NOTE

yIf the driver and/or front passenger

unfasten(s) the seatbelt(s) after fasten-

ing, the seatbelt warning device oper-

ates as follows according to the vehi-

cle speed.

yAt speeds lower than approximate-

ly 9 mph (15 km/h)

100372

PASS

100373

Instruments and controls 3-11

– CONTINUED –

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

yAt speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

yIf you unfasten and refasten the driv-

er’s seatbelt three times within six sec-

onds after turning ON the ignition

switch, the warning operation that fol-

lows the 6-second warning after turn-

ing ON the ignition switch is canceled.

When the ignition switch is turned ON

next time, however, the complete se-

quence of warning operations re-

sumes.

If there is no passenger on the front pas-

senger’s seat, the seatbelt warning device

for the front passenger’s seat will be deac-

tivated. The front passenger’s occupant

detection system monitors whether or not

there is a passenger on the front passen-

ger’s seat. Observe the following precau-

tions. Failure to do so may prevent the de-

vice from functioning correctly or cause

the device to fail.

yDo not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

yDo not store a heavy load in the seat-

back pocket.

yDo not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is de-

activated even when the front passenger

has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

SRS airbag system warn-

ing light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the SRS airbag system

warning light will come on for approxi-

mately six seconds and go out. This

shows the SRS frontal airbag and SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag and

seatbelt pretensioners are in normal oper-

ation.

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi-

nor collision or not inflate in a se-

vere collision), which may increase

the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

3-12 Instruments and controls

Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi-

cators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

tinguish for 2 seconds. After that, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag determined by the Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator will remain extinguished

while the OFF indicator will illuminate.

If both the ON and OFF indicators remain

lit or extinguished simultaneously, the sys-

tem is faulty. Contact your SUBARU deal-

er immediately for an inspection.

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator lamp

If this light comes on steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is a problem or potential prob-

lem somewhere in the emission control

system.

TIf the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while driving

or does not go out after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

PASS AIR BAG

100533

If the CHECK ENGINE light comes

on while you are driving, have your

vehicle checked/repaired by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble. Continued vehicle operation

without having the emission control

system checked and repaired as

necessary could cause serious

damage, which may not be covered

by your vehicle’s warranty.

Instruments and controls 3-13

– CONTINUED –

NOTE

This light also comes on when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light turn off immediately. It may

take several driving trips. If the light does

not go out, take your vehicle to your au-

thorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

TIf the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an en-

gine misfire condition has been detected

which may damage the emission control

system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the fol-

lowing.

yReduce vehicle speed.

yAvoid hard acceleration.

yAvoid steep uphill grades.

yReduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

yStop towing a trailer as soon as possi-

ble.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and come on steadily after

several driving trips. You should have

your vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good con-

dition but the light remains on, contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer immediate-

ly.

Oil pressure warning

light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil

is at the proper level but the light remains

on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

AT OIL TEMPerature

warning light

The AT oil temperature warning light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately two seconds.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the automatic

transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving, it is un-

necessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid

driving up steep grades or in stop and go

traffic.

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

3-14 Instruments and controls

Rear differential oil tem-

perature warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the rear differ-

ential oil temperature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving, reduce

vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the

nearest safe place.

Park the vehicle for several minutes. After

the light goes out, you can start driving.

If the light does not go out, contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

yIf the tire pressures are not correct

and/or the tires are not all the same

size and brand, the rear differential will

be heavily loaded when the vehicle is

driven, resulting in an abnormally high

oil temperature.

yThe rear differential oil will deterio-

rate if its temperature increases

enough for the rear differential oil tem-

perature warning light to come on. It is

advisable to have the rear differential

oil replaced as soon as possible.

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will come on for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will go out.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure rec-

ommended by the vehicle manufacturer

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the prop-

er inflation pressure for those tires.) As an

added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure moni-

toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a

low tire pressure telltale when one or more

of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure

telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure. Driv-

ing on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-

tain correct tire pressure, even if under-in-

flation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

The TPMS gives warning both when a tire

is significantly under-inflated and when

there is a problem in the TPMS. The low

tire pressure warning light operates differ-

ently according to these conditions as fol-

lows:

When a tire is significantly under-inflat-

ed: Steady illumination

When there is a problem in the TPMS:

Flashing

Should the warning light flash, have the

system inspected by your nearest

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Reduce vehicle speed and park the

vehicle in a safe place as soon as

possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light

comes on. Continued driving with

this light on can damage the rear dif-

ferential and other parts of the pow-

ertrain.

Instruments and controls 3-15

– CONTINUED –

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion and goes out after approximately two

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

If this light does not come on briefly

after the ignition switch is turned

ON or the light is flashing, you

should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep driv-

ing straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off

the road to a safe place. Otherwise

an accident involving serious vehi-

cle damage and serious personal in-

jury could occur.

If this light still comes on while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may have significant damage

and a fast leak that causes the tire to

lose air rapidly. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting. If the

light flashes, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked period-

ically (at least monthly) using a tire

gauge. After any change to tire pres-

sure(s), the tire pressure monitoring

system will not re-check tire infla-

tion pressures until the vehicle is

first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). Be sure to install the speci-

fied size for the front and rear tires.

(U.S.)

(Canada)

If the warning light behaves as fol-

lows, the ABS system may not work

properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

yThe warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

yThe warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, but it does not go

out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

yThe warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,

have the ABS system repaired at the

first available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

3-16 Instruments and controls

The ABS warning light comes on together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system becomes faulty. For further

details of the EBD system fault warning,

refer to “Brake system warning light”.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following, the ABS sys-

tem may be considered normal.

yThe warning light comes on right af-

ter the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

yThe warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

yThe warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately

and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Brake system

warning light

This light has the following three func-

tions:

TParking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. It goes out when the park-

ing brake is fully released.

TBrake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

come on while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the reser-

voir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the ve-

hicle towed to the nearest SUBARU deal-

er for repair.

TElectronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also illu-

minates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD

system. In that event, it comes on together

with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be faulty if the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously during driv-

ing.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are ap-

plied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

yDriving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

yIf at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

(U.S.)

(Canada)

Instruments and controls 3-17

– CONTINUED –

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system in-

spected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In-

stead, have the vehicle towed to the near-

est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6

US gal (10 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only op-

erates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

Door open warning light

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

When any of the doors or the rear gate is

not fully closed, it is indicated by the corre-

sponding part of the door warning light.

Always make sure this light is out before

you start to drive.

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

This light comes on when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank falls to

the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt,

0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes

on when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after the en-

gine has started.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters fitted on its

wheels or with the air pressure excessive-

ly low in any of its tires.

300505

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

3-18 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol operation indicator

light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is ON and goes out approximately

2 seconds later.

It blinks when the skid suppression func-

tion is activated. It illuminates when only

the traction control function is operating.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under any of the following

conditions. Have your vehicle checked at

a SUBARU dealer immediately.

yThe light does not come on when the ig-

nition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

yThe light does not go out even after a

period of approximately 2 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Trac-

tion Control system OFF

indicator light

This warning light has both the function of

indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the function of indicat-

ing that the Traction Control system has

been deactivated.

It comes on in the event of a fault in the

system and is on when the system is not

operating.

This warning light comes on when the ig-

nition switch is turned to the “ON” position

and goes out after the engine has started.

It indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is in normal operation.

TVehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the fol-

lowing conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immediate-

ly.

yThe warning light does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

yThe warning light comes on while the

vehicle is running.

yIf the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system itself becomes

faulty, the warning light only comes on. At

this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem) remains fully operational.

yThe warning light comes on when the

electronic control system of the ABS/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control system becomes

faulty.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system

provides its ABS control through the elec-

trical circuit of the ABS system. Accord-

ingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system becomes un-

able to provide ABS control. As a result,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also

becomes inoperative, causing the warning

light to come on. Though both the Vehicle

Dynamics Control and ABS systems are

inoperative in this case, the ordinary func-

tions of the brake system are still avail-

able. You will be safe while driving with

this condition, but have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

shown in the following, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system may be consid-

ered normal.

yThe warning light comes on right af-

ter the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

yThe warning light comes on after en-

gine startup and goes off while the ve-

hicle is subsequently being driven.

yThe warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately

and remains off.

TTraction Control system OFF indica-

tor light

yIt comes on when the Traction Control

system OFF switch is pressed.

Instruments and controls 3-19

– CONTINUED –

yIt also comes on when the Traction

Control system is deactivated.

NOTE

yThe light may stay on for a while after

the engine has been started, especially

in cold weather. This does not indicate

the existence of a problem. The light

should go out as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

yThe indicator light comes on when

the engine has developed a problem

and the Malfunction indicator light is

on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably faulty under the following condi-

tion. Have your vehicle checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

yThe light does not go out even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

Security indicator light

The indicators are located in the center

portion of the dashboard.

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation

of the immobilizer system.

TAlarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to the “Alarm system”

section in chapter 2.

TImmobilizer system

This light blinks approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from

“ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-

sition or immediately after the key is pulled

out. (Refer to the “Door locks” section in

chapter 2.)

If the indicator light does not flash, it may

indicate that immobilizer system may be

faulty. Contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used, the security indicator light comes

on.

SPORT mode indicator

light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

goes out after the engine has started.

When the selector lever is moved to the

manual gate, the SPORT mode is select-

ed and the indicator light comes on. (Refer

to the “Automatic transmission” section in

chapter 7.)

TAutomatic transmission control

system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts,

it may indicate that the automatic trans-

mission control system is not working

properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for service immediately.

200702

3-20 Instruments and controls

Selector lever/Gear position

indicator

The selector lever/gear position indicator

shows the position of the selector lever.

When manual mode is selected, the gear

position indicator shows the current gear

position and the upshift/downshift indica-

tor illuminates. (Refer to the “Automatic

transmission” section in chapter 7.)

Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the

turn signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be

burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as

possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs”

section in chapter 11.

High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also comes on when

the headlight flasher is operated.

Cruise control indica-

tor light

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately three seconds.

This light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

If you move the cruise control lever or

press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “CRUISE” indicator light flash-

es. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

Cruise control set indica-

tor light

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately three seconds.

This light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

Headlight indicator

light

This indicator light comes on when the

light switch is turned to the “ ” posi-

tion (to turn on the parking lights) or to the

“ ” position (to turn on the headlights).

Front fog light indicator

light

This indicator light is on while the front fog

lights are on.

300266

Instruments and controls 3-21

– CONTINUED –

Clock

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-

gation system, refer to the separate

“Operating Instructions for Monitor

System”.

The clock shows the time while the igni-

tion switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion.

To adjust the time shown by the clock,

press the “+” button or the “–” button. The

indicated time will change in one-minute

increments. If you keep the button

pressed, the rate at which the indicated

time changes will speed up.

When you keep either the “+” or “– “ button

pressed, time change will pause for 1 sec-

ond at the end of each 30-minute change.

The clock will start going forward or back-

ward again quickly after this 1-second

pause.

Outside temperature indica-

tion

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-

gation system, refer to the separate

“Operating Instructions for Monitor

System”.

U.S.-spec. vehicles

CLOCK

300603

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

set the time during driving, as an ac-

cident could result.

300602

300550

3-22 Instruments and controls

Canada-spec. vehicles

The outside temperature indicator shows

the outside temperature in a range from

–22 to 122°F (–30 to 50°C).

The indicator can give a false reading un-

der any of the following conditions:

yWhen there is too much sun.

yDuring idling; while running at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine is

restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

yWhen the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

TLow outside temperature warning

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Canada-spec. vehicles

When the outside temperature drops to

37°F (3°C) or lower, the temperature indi-

cation flashes to show that the road sur-

face may be frozen.

If the outside temperature drops to 37°F

(3°C) or lower while the display is giving

an indication other than the outside tem-

perature, the display switches to the out-

side temperature indication and flashes

for five seconds before returning to its

original indication.

If the display is already indicating an out-

side temperature of 37°F (3°C) or lower

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indication does not

flash.

NOTE

The outside temperature indication

may differ from the actual outside tem-

perature. The road surface freeze warn-

ing indication should be treated only

as a guide. Be sure to check the condi-

tion of the road surface before driving.

300551

300552

300553

Instruments and controls 3-23

– CONTINUED –

Multi function display (Vehi-

cle without Navigation Sys-

tem)

NOTE

yIf your vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system, refer to the sepa-

rate “Operating Instructions for Moni-

tor System”.

yA liquid-crystal display is used in the

multi function display. You will find its

indications hard to see if you wear po-

larized glasses.

With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion, each successive push of the “INFO”

button toggles the display in the following

sequence:

Press the “INFO” button for more than 1

second to turn off the display. The display

will turn on again if you press either the

“INFO” button or “AUDIO” button.

Current fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Canada-spec. vehicles

This indication shows the rate of fuel con-

sumption at the present moment.

Average fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Current

fuel con-

sumption

Average

fuel con-

sumption

Driving range

on remaining fuel

Journey time

300554

300555

300556

3-24 Instruments and controls

Canada-spec. vehicles

This indication shows the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-

tion between the average fuel consump-

tion corresponding to the A trip meter indi-

cation and the average fuel consumption

corresponding to the B trip meter indica-

tion.

When either of the trip meter indications is

reset, the corresponding average fuel

consumption value is also reset.

NOTE

yThe indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values may differ slightly from the ac-

tual values and should thus be treated

only as a guide.

yWhen either trip meter indication is

reset, the average fuel consumption

corresponding to that trip meter indica-

tion is not shown until the vehicle has

subsequently covered a distance of 1

mile (or 1 km).

Driving range on remaining

fuel

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Canada-spec. vehicles

The driving range indicates the distance

that can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

the average rate of fuel consumption.

When the low fuel warning light comes on,

the driving range indication flashes for five

seconds. (The display first switches to the

driving range indication if it was originally

giving some other indication.)

300557

300558

300559

Instruments and controls 3-25

U.S.-spec. vehicles

Canada-spec. vehicles

If the driving range is shown as “ ”,

there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the

tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-

ately.

NOTE

yThe driving range on remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value

may differ from the actual driving

range on remaining fuel, so you must

immediately fill the tank when the low

fuel warning light comes on.

yWhen the low fuel warning light is lit,

the display automatically shows

“ ” even if the currently selected

indication is not for the driving range

on remaining fuel.

Journey time

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “START” position.

The journey time indication flashes each

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

display is giving an indication other than

the journey time, the display switches to

the journey time, flashes for five seconds,

and returns to its original indication each

time a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-

tion. It is also reset if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK” or

“ACC” position prior to restarting of

the engine.

300560

300561

300562

300563

3-26 Instruments and controls

Light control switch

The light switch operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

first position

Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, tail lights and license plate light are

on.

second position

Headlights, parking lights, instrument pan-

el illumination, tail lights, and license plate

light are on.

High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “ ” on the instru-

ment panel is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the detent position.

Headlight flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the lever to-

ward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

To prevent battery discharge result-

ing from accidentally leaving your

lights on when your vehicle is

parked, the light switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position. In any other posi-

tion, the vehicle’s lights will be out.

If you park your vehicle on a road-

side at night, use the hazard warn-

ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

300506

300507

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

300508

Instruments and controls 3-27

– CONTINUED –

the high beam indicator light “ ” on

the instrument panel also comes on.

Daytime running light system

The low beam headlights will automatical-

ly come on at reduced brightness when

the engine has started, under the follow-

ing conditions:

yThe parking brake is fully released.

yThe light switch is in the “OFF” or

“ ” position.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn sig-

nal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal in-

dicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will re-

turn automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

Illumination brightness con-

trol

When the light switch is in the “OFF” posi-

tion, you can adjust the brightness of the

instrument panel illumination for better

visibility.

The brightness of audio, air conditioner,

multi-function display (if equipped) and in-

strument panel illumination automatically

dims when the light switch is in the

“ ” or “ ” positions. You can ad-

just brightness of the illumination for better

visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

When the control dial is turned fully up-

The tail lights, parking lights, and

side marker lights are not turned on

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “ ” position when

it is dark outside.

300509

300510

3-28 Instruments and controls

ward, the illumination brightness be-

comes the maximum and the automatic

dimming function does not work at all.

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch, fol-

lowing lights will come on.

– Parking lights

– Front side marker lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the park-

ing light switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long

time because that will run down the bat-

tery.

Front fog light switch

The front fog lights operate only when the

light switch is in the “ ” position.

However, the front fog lights turn off when

the headlights are switched to high beam.

To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog

light switch on the turn signal lever upward

to the “ ” position. To turn off the front

fog lights, turn the switch back down to the

“OFF” position.

300511 300512

Instruments and controls 3-29

– CONTINUED –

The indicator light located on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate when the fog

lights are on.

Wiper and washer

300513

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

yDo not operate the washer contin-

uously for more than ten seconds,

or when the washer fluid tank is

empty. This may cause overheat-

ing of the washer motor. Check

the washer fluid level frequently,

such as at fuel stops.

yDo not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

cause the wiper motor to burn out.

Before operating the wiper on a

dry windshield or rear window, al-

ways use the windshield washer.

yIn freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window be-

fore switching on the wipers. At-

tempting to operate the wiper with

the blades frozen to the window

glass could cause not only the

wiper blades to be damaged but

also the wiper motor to burn out. If

the wiper blades are frozen to the

window glass, be sure to operate

the defroster, wiper deicer (if

equipped) or rear window defog-

ger before turning on the wiper.

yIf the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, the

wiper motor could burn out even if

the wiper switch is turned off. If

this occurs, promptly stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place, turn the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” posi-

tion and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

3-30 Instruments and controls

NOTE

yThe front wiper motor is protected

against overloads by a circuit breaker.

If the motor operates continuously un-

der an unusually heavy load, the circuit

breaker may trip to stop the motor tem-

porarily. If this happens, park your ve-

hicle in a safe place, turn off the wiper

switch, and wait for approximately 10

minutes. The circuit breaker will reset

itself, and the wipers will again operate

normally.

yClean your wiper blades and window

glass periodically with a washer solu-

tion to prevent streaking, and to re-

move accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button de-

pressed at least for 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

yGrease, wax, insects or other materi-

al on the windshield or the wiper

blades results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you can-

not remove those streaks after operat-

ing the washer or if the wiper operation

is jerky, clean the outer surface of the

windshield or rear window and the wip-

er blades using a sponge or soft cloth

with a neutral detergent or mild-abra-

sive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the

window glass and wiper blades with

clean water. The glass is clean if no

beads form on the glass when you

rinse with water.

yIf you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure, re-

place the wiper blades with new ones.

Refer to the “Replacement of wiper

blades” section (chapter 11) for re-

placement instructions.

Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

TWindshield wipers

OFF: Park

: Intermittent

LO: Low speed

HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper con-

trol lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

yUse clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In ar-

eas where water freezes in winter,

use SUBARU Windshield Washer

Fluid or the equivalent. (See

“Windshield washer fluid” section

in chapter 11.)

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wiper

blades.

yDo not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as

paint thinner or benzene. This will

cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

300286

Instruments and controls 3-31

– CONTINUED –

TMist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the le-

ver toward you. The wipers operate until

you release the lever.

TWiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” po-

sition, turn the dial to adjust the operating

interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted in

nine steps.

The intermittent operation interval varies

depending on the vehicle speed in any of

the adjustment steps (longer when the ve-

hicle speed is low; shorter when the vehi-

cle speed is high).

TWasher

To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control le-

ver. The washer fluid sprays until you re-

lease the washer button. The wipers oper-

ate while you push the button.

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light comes on when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

tank refilling method, refer to the

“Windshield washer fluid” section in

chapter 11.

300288

300287

300289

300544

3-32 Instruments and controls

Rear window wiper and wash-

er switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper opera-

tion)

ON: Continuous

INT: Intermittent

OFF: Park

: Washer (accompanied by wiper opera-

tion)

TRear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on

the end of the wiper control lever upward

to the “INT” or “ON” position.

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on

the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

With the switch turned to the “INT” posi-

tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-

tently at intervals corresponding to the ve-

hicle speed (longer when the vehicle

speed is low; shorter when the vehicle

speed is high).

When you subsequently move the selec-

tor lever of the automatic transmission to

the “R” position, the rear wiper will switch

to continuous operation. When you move

the selector lever from the “R” position to

some other position, the rear wiper will re-

turn to intermittent operation.

TWasher

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever upward to

the “ ” position. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever downward to

the “ ” position. The washer fluid

sprays and the wiper operates until you

release the knob.

Windshield wiper deicer

The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

Before turning on the windshield wiper de-

icer, remove any snow from the wind-

shield. To turn on the windshield wiper de-

icer, push the button. The indicator light

located on the button lights up while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automati-

cally shut off after approximately 15 min-

utes. If the windshield wiper blades have

been deiced completely before that time,

push the button to turn it off. It also turns

off when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not

300290 300515

Instruments and controls 3-33

– CONTINUED –

complete, you have to push the button to

turn the deicer on again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-

shield wiper deicer for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

Once the windshield wiper deicer has

been set for continuous operation, press-

ing the button results in continuous opera-

tion. The windshield wiper deicer automat-

ically stops operating if any one of the fol-

lowing conditions occurs during continu-

ous operation.

yThe outside temperature becomes 41°F

(5°C) or higher.

yThe vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15

km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.

yThe battery voltage decreases below

the permissible level.

Rear window defogger but-

ton

The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

The rear window defogger button is locat-

ed on the climate control panel.

To turn on the defogger, push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again.

The indicator light located on the button

lights up while the rear window defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off af-

ter approximately 15 minutes. If the win-

dow clears before that time, push the but-

ton to turn it off. It also turns off when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear

window defogger for continuous opera-

tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

Once the rear window defogger has been

set for continuous operation, the rear win-

dow defogger repeatedly operates for 15

minutes, stops for two minutes, and again

operates for 15 minutes. If the battery volt-

age drops below the permissible level,

continuous operation is canceled and op-

eration stops as described in the follow-

ing.

yIf the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level within 15 minutes of de-

pression of the button, continuous opera-

tion is canceled and the rear window de-

fogger stops operating 15 minutes later.

yIf the battery voltage drops below the

permissible level after the rear window de-

fogger has, following depression of the

button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped

operating for two minutes, and started op-

erating again, the rear window defogger

immediately stops operating.

300522

3-34 Instruments and controls

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-

side mirror defogger, the outside mir-

ror defogger operates while the rear

window defogger is operating.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night po-

sition. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mir-

ror toward you for the night position. Push

it away for the day position. The night po-

sition reduces glare from headlights.

Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an

anti-glare feature which automatically re-

duces glare coming from headlights of ve-

hicles behind you. It also contains a built-

in compass.

yBy pressing and releasing the left but-

ton, the automatic dimming function is tog-

gled on or off. When the automatic dim-

ming function is on, the auto dimming indi-

cator light (green) located to the right of

the button will illuminate.

yBy pressing and releasing the right but-

yDo not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may dam-

age the conductors printed on the

window.

yTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any long-

er than necessary.

300516

300517

Instruments and controls 3-35

– CONTINUED –

ton, the compass display is toggled on or

off. When the compass is on, an illuminat-

ed compass reading will appear in the

lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,

the mirror surface turns bright if the trans-

mission is shifted into reverse. This is to

ensure good rearward visibility during re-

versing.

TPhotosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. If the glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it

and make the reflection surface of the mir-

ror dimmer to help prevent you from being

blinded. For this reason, use care not to

cover the sensors with stickers, or other

similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-

sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton

cloth or an applicator.

TCompass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear

window defogger, heater/air conditioning

system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and

make certain the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3 sec-

onds then release, and the compass will

enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and di-

rection will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” dis-

appears from the display (approximately

two or three circles). The compass is now

calibrated.

5. Further calibration may be necessary

should outside influences cause the mirror

to read inaccurately. You will know that

this has occurred if your compass begins

to read in only limited directions. Should

you encounter this situation, return to step

one of the above procedure and recali-

brate the mirror.

TCompass zone adjustment

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zone” map attached to the end of this

manual to verify that the compass zone

setting is correct for your geographical lo-

cation.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word

“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the

zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible

zone settings. Stop cycling when the cor-

rect zone setting for your location is dis-

played.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

300518

3-36 Instruments and controls

Outside mirrors

TConvex mirror (Passenger side)

TRemote control mirror switch

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust

the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to ad-

just the right-hand mirror.

2. Move the knob in the direction you

want to move the mirror.

3. Return the knob to the neutral position

to prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manual-

ly.

TOutside mirror defogger

The outside mirror defogger shares the

button with rear window defogger.

The outside mirror defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger,

push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again. The

indicator light located on the button lights

up while the outside mirror defogger is op-

erating.

The defogger will automatically shut off af-

ter approximately 15 minutes. If the mirror

clears before that time, push the button to

turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position. If defrosting or defogging is de-

sired when you restart your vehicle, you

have to push the button to turn it on again.

NOTE

yWhile the outside mirror defogger is

operating, the rear window defogger

also operates.

yWhen the rear window defogger has

been set for continuous operation, the

outside mirror defogger also operates

continuously. Refer to the “Rear win-

dow defogger button” section in this

chapter.

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the dis-

tance of vehicles behind you when

changing lanes. Use the inside mir-

ror (or glance backwards) to deter-

mine the actual size and distance of

objects that you view in convex mir-

ror.

300519

300522

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

Instruments and controls 3-37

Tilt steering wheel

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).

2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Push the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt

position while driving. This may

cause loss of vehicle control and re-

sult in personal injury.

300520

300521

Climate control

Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2

Air flow ..................................................................... 4-2

Ventilator ................................................................. 4-4

Automatic climate control system .................... 4-5

Control panel ........................................................... 4-5

Rear air conditioner (if equipped) ......................... 4-9

Temperature sensors ............................................. 4-9

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .. 4-10

Cleaning ventilator grille ........................................ 4-10

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ................................................................. 4-10

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit ..................................................................... 4-10

Checking air conditioning system before

summer season .................................................... 4-10

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather condition .................... 4-10

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when

engine is heavily loaded ...................................... 4-10

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-10

Air filtration system ............................................ 4-11

Replacing the air filter ............................................ 4-11

4-2 Climate control

Climate control

Ventilator

Air flow

400500

Climate control 4-3

– CONTINUED –

TAir flow mode selection

400501

4-4 Climate control

Ventilator

TCenter ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

TSide ventilator

1) Open

2) Close

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

To open the ventilator, turn the side grille

open/close wheel upward.

To close it, turn the wheel downward.

TRear ventilators (if equipped)

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

400503

400504 400505

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

Automatic climate control

system

NOTE

yOperate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is run-

ning.

yThe blower fan rotates at a low speed

when the engine coolant temperature

is low.

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button.

yEven when cooling is not necessary,

setting the temperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indica-

tor light on the control panel comes on.

ySeven-seater models each have a

rear air conditioner. The fan speed of

the rear air conditioner can be adjust-

ed, but other adjustments (outlet air

temperature, air distribution, etc.) are

not possible for the rear air condition-

er. For details, refer to “Rear air condi-

tioner (if equipped)” in this section.

The automatic climate control system au-

tomatically controls outlet air temperature,

fan speed, air flow distribution air-inlet

control, and air conditioner compressor

operation. It activates when the “AUTO”

button is pressed, and is used to maintain

a constant, comfortable climate within the

passenger compartment.

The temperature can be set within a range

of 65 to 85°F (18 to 32°C).

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)

2) Defroster button

3) Fan speed control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” in

chapter 3.)

5) Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)

6) Air conditioner button

7) Air flow mode selection button

8) Air inlet selection button

9) OFF button

10)AUTO button

TAUTO button

AUTO mode operation:

When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the

indicator light on the button comes on. In

this state, fan speed, air flow distribution,

air-inlet control, and air conditioner com-

pressor operation are automatically con-

trolled.

Manual mode operation:

If you operate any of the buttons on the

control panel other than the “OFF” button

and temperature control dial during auto-

matic mode operation, the indicator light

will go out. You can then manually control

the system as desired using the button

you operated.

10 9 8 7 6

2 3 4 5

400506

400507

4-6 Climate control

To change the system back to the AUTO

mode, press the “AUTO” button.

TOFF button

The Automatic Climate Control system

turns off (the air conditioner compressor

and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is

pressed.

When the “OFF” button is pressed, the

outside air introduction mode (air inlet se-

lection OFF) is automatically selected.

TTemperature control dial

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

It is possible to make separate tempera-

ture settings for the driver’s side and pas-

senger’s side. Each temperature setting is

shown on the display. With the dial set at

your desired temperature, the system au-

tomatically adjusts the temperature of air

supplied from the outlets such that the de-

sired temperature is achieved and main-

tained.

Turning the dial counterclockwise and re-

leasing it reduces the temperature by 1°F

(0.5°C). Turning the dial clockwise and re-

leasing it increases the temperature by

1°F (0.5°C). Holding the dial in either

turned position causes the temperature to

change continuously.

With the minimum temperature set, the

system gives maximum cooling perfor-

mance. With the maximum temperature

set, the system gives maximum heating

performance.

400508

400509

400510

Climate control 4-7

– CONTINUED –

T – Defroster button

To defrost or dehumidify the windshield

and front door windows, push the defrost-

er button “ ”. When the “ ” button

is pushed, regardless whether the air con-

ditioner is operating or not, outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment,

the air conditioner compressor turns on,

air flow is directed towards the windshield

and front door windows, and the indicator

light on the button comes on.

After eliminating the fogging from the

windshield, return the climate control sys-

tem to the AUTO mode by pushing the

“AUTO” button or turn off by pushing the

“OFF” button.

Alternatively, push the “ ” button

again to return the system to the setting

that was selected before you activated the

defroster.

TFan speed control dial

The fan speed control dial has 7 positions:

AUTO position and 6 different fan speed

positions.

The fan speed is shown on the center of

the dial.

With the fan speed control dial in the

AUTO position, the fan speed changes

automatically corresponding the various

conditions: air temperature inside and out-

side of the passenger’s compartment, in-

tensity of the sunlight, etc.

TA/C – Air conditioner button

If the windshield starts to fog when the cli-

mate control system is operated in the

AUTO mode, push the air conditioner but-

ton to defog and dehumidify.

When this button is pushed, the air condi-

tioner compressor turns on and the indica-

tor light on the button comes on. After

eliminating the fogging from the wind-

shield, set the system back to the AUTO

mode by pushing the “AUTO” button.

NOTE

The air conditioner compressor does

not operate when the outside air tem-

perature is below 32°F (0°C).

400511

400512

400513

4-8 Climate control

TAir flow mode selection button

Select the desired air flow mode by push-

ing the air flow mode selection button. The

selected air flow mode is shown on the the

center of the dial.

(Ventilation): Air flows through the in-

strument panel outlets.

(Bi-level): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets and the foot outlets.

(Heat): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets, the foot outlets, and

some through the windshield defroster

outlets.

(Heat-def): Air flows through the instru-

ment panel outlets, the windshield defrost-

er outlets, and the foot outlets.

TAir inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road. The indica-

tor light will come on.

OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air

is drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty. The indicator light will

go off.

NOTE

When driving on a dusty road or be-

hind a vehicle that emits unpleasant

exhaust gases, set the air inlet selec-

tion button to the ON position.

From time to time, return the air inlet

selection button to the OFF position to

draw outside air into the passenger

compartment.

400514

400515

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

Climate control 4-9

Rear air conditioner (if

equipped)

The rear air conditioner blows cool air out

of the rear ventilators while the “A/C” but-

ton on the control panel is in the “ON” po-

sition. The fan speed of the rear air condi-

tioner can be adjusted using the rear air

conditioner dial behind the center console.

The fan speed can be adjusted in four

steps by turning the dial. Turn the dial to

the “OFF” position to stop the fan.

NOTE

yWhen the “A/C” button is in the

“OFF” position and when the “A/C” in-

dicator is not illuminated during AUTO-

mode operation, the air conditioner

compressor does not operate, mean-

ing that the system merely blows un-

cooled air out of the ventilators.

yThe outlet air temperature of the rear

air conditioner cannot be adjusted.

yThe rear air conditioner cannot be

used as a heater.

Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system em-

ploys several sensors. These sensors are

delicate. If they are treated incorrectly and

become damaged, the system may not be

able to control the interior temperature

correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors,

observe the following precautions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside windshield de-

froster grille

– Interior air temperature sensor: on the

side of the driver-side part of the center

panel

– Outside temperature sensor: behind

front grille

400516

400517

4-10 Climate control

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

Cleaning ventilator grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept

clean because cooling performance is im-

paired by any accumulation of insects and

leaves on the condenser.

Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to al-

low outside air to circulate into the heated

interior. This results in quicker cooling by

the air conditioner. Keep the windows

closed during the operation of the air con-

ditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper op-

eration each spring. Have your SUBARU

dealer perform this check.

Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather condition

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.)

a small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning sys-

tem.

Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is de-

signed to temporarily shut off during air

conditioner operation whenever the accel-

erator is fully depressed such as during

rapid acceleration or when driving on a

steep upgrade.

Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the

method of adding, changing or checking

the refrigerant is different from the method

for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

400518

Climate control 4-11

– CONTINUED –

Air filtration system

Replace the filter element according to the

replacement schedule shown in the fol-

lowing. This schedule should be followed

to maintain the filter’s dust collection abili-

ty. Under extremely dusty conditions, the

filter should be replaced more frequently.

Have your filter checked or replaced by

your SUBARU dealer. For replacement,

we recommend the use of a genuine

SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000

km) whichever comes first

Replacing the air filter

1. Remove the instrument panel side cov-

er.

NOTE

The instrument panel side cover is held

in place with four pins.

2. Unhook the strap.

3. Remove the glove box by detaching

the one clip on the side.

4. Remove the air filter cover by detach-

ing the five clips.

400561

400562

400595

400596

4-12 Climate control

5. Unhook the air filter and draw it out.

6. Replace the air filter with a new one.

7. Install the air filter cover.

8. Install the glove box.

9. Attach the strap to the hook.

10.Secure the glove box with the one clip.

11.Install the instrument panel side cover.

12.Label installation

Attach the caution label to the driver’s

door.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

400564

400565

400562

400595

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through

the vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

400566

Audio

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

Printed antenna ....................................................... 5-2

FM reception ........................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories ................................ 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Type A audio set ..................................................... 5-3

Type B audio set ..................................................... 5-3

Type A audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-4

Radio operation ...................................................... 5-4

Compact disc player operation ............................. 5-8

Type B audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-13

Radio operation ...................................................... 5-13

Built-in CD changer operation ............................... 5-17

Audio control buttons ........................................ 5-22

Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc ................................................... 5-23

MP3 audio ........................................................... 5-25

What is MP3? .......................................................... 5-25

Creating MP3 files ................................................... 5-25

Saving MP3 files on a disc ..................................... 5-25

Supported file systems .......................................... 5-26

Compression format ............................................... 5-26

Numbers of folders and files ................................. 5-26

5-2 Audio

Audio

Antenna system

Printed antenna

The antenna is printed on the inner sur-

face of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate

significantly if you apply tinting film or

any other material over the antenna

portion of the rear window glass.

FM reception

Although FM is normally static free, recep-

tion can be affected by the surrounding ar-

ea, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstructions may cause mo-

mentary static, flutter or station interfer-

ence. If reception continues to be unsatis-

factory, switch to a stronger station.

NOTE

If a cell phone is placed near the radio,

it may cause the radio to emit noise

when it receives calls. This noise does

not indicate a radio fault.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer be-

fore installing a citizen band radio or other

transmitting device in your vehicle. Such

devices may cause the electronic control

system to malfunction if they are incorrect-

ly installed or if they are not suited for the

vehicle.

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

500200

Audio 5-3

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one

of the following audio sets. See the pages

indicated in this section for operating de-

tails.

Type A audio set

yRadio operation: refer to page 5-4

yCD (compact disc) player operation: re-

fer to page 5-8

Type B audio set

yRadio operation: refer to page 5-13

yBuilt-in CD changer operation: refer to

page 5-17

500201

500206

5-4 Audio

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Radio operation

(2)(1) (4) (5) (7) (8)(3) (6)

(9)(9)

500203

1) AM button

2) FM button

3) AUX RSE button

4) TUNE TRACK button

5) Power switch, volume control dial

6) SEEK FLDR button

7) SCAN button

8) TONE BAL button

9) Preset button

TPower switch and volume control

The dial (5) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial. The dial can also be used for tone

and balance adjustment.

TTone and balance control

The volume control dial (5) normally func-

tions as a volume control. This dial be-

comes a control for Bass, Midrange, Tre-

ble, Fader or Balance when you select the

appropriate tone and balance control

mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the volume control dial.

The control function returns to volume

control mode after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

Audio 5-5

– CONTINUED –

VTo change tone and balance control

modes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL” but-

ton (8) changes control modes in the fol-

lowing sequence starting from volume

control mode. (When the radio is first

turned on, the control mode is in the vol-

ume control.)

The “TONE BAL” button is used for select-

ing the following control modes:

Volume

(VOLUME)

Bass

(BASS)

Midrange

(MIDDLE)

Treble

(TREBLE)

Fader

(FADER)

Balance

(BALANCE)

5-6 Audio

TFM/AM selection button

Push the “FM” (2) or “AM” (1) button when the radio is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

Control mode (Range of

levels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (–6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (–6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (–6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker volume

and decrease front speaker vol-

ume

To increase front speaker volume

and decrease rear speaker vol-

ume

Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volume

and decrease right speaker vol-

ume

To increase right speaker volume

and decrease left speaker vol-

ume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

500204

TStereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

TTuning

VManual tuning

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (4) to increase the tuning frequency

and press the “ ” side of the button to

decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the fre-

quency interval can be changed between

10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the

FM mode.

If you hold down the “ ” side of the but-

ton, the tuning frequency will increase

continuously, and if you hold down the

“ ” side of the button, the tuning fre-

quency will decrease continuously. Re-

lease the button when your desired fre-

quency is reached.

NOTE

While you are holding down either side

of the TUNE TRACK button, the tuning

frequency will not stop changing even

if the frequency of a receivable station

is reached.

VSeek tuning

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button (6), the radio will auto-

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

matically search for a receivable station

and stop at the first one it finds. This func-

tion may not be available, however, when

radio signals are weak. In such a situation,

perform manual tuning to select the de-

sired station.

VAutomatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (7) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for five seconds while displaying

the frequency, after which scanning will

continue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis-

played frequency.

Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK

FLDR (6) button again to cancel the scan

mode and to stop on any displayed fre-

quency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high fre-

quencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function proper-

ly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

TSelecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(9) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six, AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

THow to preset stations

1. Press the “FM” (2) or “AM” (1) button to

select FM1, FM2, or AM reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (7) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (9) for

more than 1.5 seconds to store the fre-

quency. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

yIf the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the pre-

set buttons are cleared. If this occurs,

it is necessary to reset the preset but-

tons.

yIf a cell phone is placed near the ra-

dio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio fault.

TRear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, you can en-

joy audio outputs from the system through

the vehicle’s speakers by pressing the

“RSE AUX” button. Press the button again

to return to the audio set sound.

5-8 Audio

Compact disc player operation

(1) (2) (5) (6) (7)(3) (4)

(8)

500205

1) CD button

2) TUNE TRACK button

3) AUDIO button

4) SEEK FLDR button

5) RDM button

6) RPT button

7) SCAN button

8) Eject button

TTo playback a compact disc

VWhen CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then

insert it in to the slot (with the label side

up) and the player will automatically pull

the disc into position.

NOTE

yDO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO

THE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A

TIME.

yBe sure to insert a disc with the label

side up. If you insert the disc the label

side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not

play anything.

yAfter the last song finishes, the play-

er will automatically return to track 1

(the first song on the disc).

yIf you insert a disc that cannot be

played by the player, “CHECK DISC”

Audio 5-9

– CONTINUED –

will appear on the display and the play-

er will revert to the previously selected

mode.

yThe player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

ySingle CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are

not supported, and if inserted, they will

be immediately ejected.

VWhen CD is in the player

When the “CD” button (1) is pressed, the

player will start playback.

NOTE

After the last song finishes, the player

will automatically return to track 1 (the

first song on the disc).

TTo stop playback of a CD

When the “POWER-VOL” button is

pressed during playback of a CD, the CD

stops playing temporarily. To let the CD

resume playing, press the button again.

TTo select a song from its beginning

VForward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE

TRACK button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the next track/file (track). Each time this

side of the button is pressed, the indicated

track/file (track) number will increase.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

VBackward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE

TRACK button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the current track/file (track). Each time

this side of the button is pressed, the indi-

cated track/file (track) number will de-

crease.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

TFast-forwarding and fast-reversing

VFast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (2) continuously to fast-forward the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-forward-

ing.

NOTE

If you fast-forward past the last track/

file (track) on the disc, the player will

select the first track/file (track) on the

disc and start playing it.

VFast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (2) continuously to fast-reverse the

track/file (track).

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTE

If you fast-reverse to the beginning of

the first track/file (track) on the disc,

the fast-reversing will stop and the

player will start playing the first track/

file (track) on the disc.

TFolder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “ ” side of the SEEK FLDR

button (2) briefly to select the next folder.

Pressing the “ ” side of the same button

the first time makes the player go back to

the beginning of the currently selected file;

pressing it a second time makes it go back

to the previously selected file.

NOTE

Only MP3 folders are recognized when

an attempt to select the next or previ-

ous folder is made. If no appropriate

folder exists on the disc, pressing the

“ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK FLDR

button has no effect.

5-10 Audio

TRepeating

VTo repeat the currently playing

track/file (track)

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the “RPT” button (6) while the track/file

(track) is playing. The display will show

“RPT”, and the track/file (track) will be re-

peated.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode:

Press the “RPT” button once (non-MP3

disc)

Press the “RPT” button twice (MP3 disc)

The “RPT” indication will go off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

yWith an MP3 disc inserted, each time

you briefly press the button, the mode

will change to the next one in the fol-

lowing sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the track/file (track) repeat-

play mode, press it again to reselect

the repeat-play mode.

yThe repeat-play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

VTo repeat the currently playing fold-

er (MP3 disc)

To repeat the currently playing folder,

press the “RPT” (6) button twice while a

file (track) is playing. The display will show

“D-RPT”, and the folder will be played re-

peatedly.

To cancel the folder repeat-play mode,

press the “RPT” button once more. The

“D-RPT” indication will go off, and the nor-

mal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

yEach time you briefly press the but-

ton, the mode will change to the next

one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the folder repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

folder repeat-play mode.

yThe folder repeat-play mode will be

cancelled if you perform any of the fol-

lowing steps:

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

TRandom playback

VNon-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during

disc playback to play all of the tracks on

the disc in a random order. The display will

show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel random mode, press the button

again. The “RDM” indication will go off,

and the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

Random playback will be cancelled if

RPT D-RPT CANCEL

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

you perform any of the following steps:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

VMP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc

playback to play all of the tracks in the

folder currently being played in random or-

der. Press the “RDM” button again to play

all of the tracks on the disc in random or-

der. The display will show “RDM” during

the random mode.

To cancel the random mode, press the

“RDM” button during “in-disc” random

playback. The “RDM” indication will go off,

and the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

yEach time you briefly press the but-

ton, the mode will change to the next

one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the random mode, press it

again to reselect the random mode.

yRandom playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

TScan

The scan mode lets you listen to the first

10 seconds of each track/file (track) on the

disc/folder in succession. Press the

“SCAN” button (7) to start scanning

through all tracks upward beginning with

the track/file (track) following the currently

selected one. After all tracks/files (tracks)

on the disc/folder has been scanned, nor-

mal playback mode is restored.

To cancel a scan, press the button again.

NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you

perform any of the following opera-

tions:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “ ” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

TUNE TRACK button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

TTo eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the eject but-

ton “ ” (8). The disc will be ejected.

NOTE

yAvoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

yIf the disc is left ejected for more

than approximately 15 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position, a disc protection func-

CANCEL

5-12 Audio

tion will operate, automatically reload-

ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not

played.

TDisplay selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) for 0.5

second or longer during playback, the in-

dication will change to the next one in the

following sequence.

TPage (track/folder title) scroll (MP3

disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)

to select track title or folder title display,

you press the “AUDIO” button again for

less than 0.5 second, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see eight characters at a time.

NOTE

The display is designed to show titles

for up to three pages (64 characters in

total).

File title Time

Folder title

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” positions.

Radio operation

(2)(1) (4) (5) (7) (8)(3) (6)

(9)(9)

500207

1) AM button

2) FM button

3) AUX RSE button

4) TUNE TRACK button

5) Power switch, volume control dial

6) SEEK FLDR button

7) SCAN button

8) TONE BAL button

9) Preset button

TPower switch and volume control

The dial (5) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial. The dial can also be used for tone

and balance adjustment.

TTone and balance control

The volume control dial (5) normally func-

tions as a volume control. This dial be-

comes a control for Bass, Midrange, Tre-

ble, Fader or Balance when you select the

appropriate tone and balance control

mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the volume control dial.

The control function returns to volume

control mode after approximately 5 sec-

onds.

5-14 Audio

VTo change tone and balance control

modes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL” but-

ton (8) changes control modes in the fol-

lowing sequence starting from volume

control mode. (When the radio is first

turned on, the control mode is in the vol-

ume control.)

The “TONE BAL” button is used for select-

ing the following control modes:

Volume

(VOLUME)

Bass

(BASS)

Midrange

(MIDDLE)

Treble

(TREBLE)

Fader

(FADER)

Balance

(BALANCE)

Audio 5-15

– CONTINUED –

TFM/AM selection button

Push the “FM” (2) or “AM” (1) button when the radio is off to turn on the radio.

Push the “FM” or “AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

Control mode (Range of

levels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (–6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (–6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (–6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker volume

and decrease front speaker vol-

ume

To increase front speaker volume

and decrease rear speaker vol-

ume

Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volume

and decrease right speaker vol-

ume

To increase right speaker volume

and decrease left speaker vol-

ume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

500204

TStereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

TTuning

VManual tuning

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (4) to increase the tuning frequency

and press the tuning button marked “ ”

to decrease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the fre-

quency interval can be changed between

10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the

FM mode.

If you hold down the “ ” side of the but-

ton, the tuning frequency will increase

continuously, and if you hold down the

“ ” side of the button, the tuning fre-

quency will decrease continuously. Re-

lease the button when your desired fre-

quency is reached.

NOTE

While you are holding down either side

of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning

frequency will not stop changing even

if the frequency of a receivable station

is reached.

VSeek tuning (SEEK)

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button (6), the radio will auto-

5-16 Audio

matically search for a receivable station

and stop at the first one it finds. This func-

tion may not be available, however, when

radio signals are weak. In such a situation,

perform manual tuning to select the de-

sired station.

VScan tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (7) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for five seconds while displaying

the frequency, after which scanning will

continue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis-

played frequency.

Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK

FLDR button (6) again to cancel the scan

mode and to stop on any displayed fre-

quency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high fre-

quencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function proper-

ly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

TSelecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

allows you to select that station in a single

operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2

stations each may be preset.

THow to preset stations

1. Press the “FM” (2) or “AM” (1) button to

select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (7) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons for

more than 1.5 seconds to store the fre-

quency. If the button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection

will remain in memory.

NOTE

yIf the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the pre-

set buttons are cleared. If this occurs,

it is necessary to reset the preset but-

tons.

yIf a cell phone is placed near the ra-

dio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio fault.

TRear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear

Seat Entertainment System, you can en-

joy audio outputs from the system through

the vehicle’s speakers by pressing the

“RSE AUX” button. Press the button again

to return to the audio set sound.

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

Built-in CD changer operation

(1) (2) (5) (6) (7)(3) (4)

(9) (8)(9)(10)

500208

1) CD button

2) TUNE TRACK button

3) AUDIO button

4) SEEK FLDR button

5) RDM button

6) RPT button

7) SCAN button

8) Eject button

9) Disc select button

10) LOAD button

NOTE

yBe sure to insert a disc with the label

side up. If you insert the disc the label

side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not

play anything.

yIf a disc is inserted during a radio

broadcast, the disc will interrupt the

broadcast.

yThe player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

ySingle CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are

not supported, and if inserted, they will

be immediately ejected.

yInsert discs slowly, one at a time. In-

serting discs one over another could

result in malfunction of the CD chang-

er.

5-18 Audio

THow to insert a CD(s)

VInserting a CD

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If

the magazine in the player has an idle po-

sition where you can insert a disc, the disc

number indicator associated with the idle

position will blink.

If no indicator blinks, it means that there is

no idle position in the magazine.

2. After the disc number indicator has

started to flash, insert the disc when

“LOAD” flashes on the display. The disc

will then be automatically drawn in, and

the player will begin to play back the first

track of the disc.

yTo insert more discs in succession, re-

peat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be

loaded with discs in the ascending order

of position number.

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” but-

ton, the player will begin to play back the

first track of the last disc you have insert-

ed.

yThe disc indicator steadily lights up if a

disc is already inserted in the correspond-

ing position of the magazine.

yWhile the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM” or “AM” button, the play-

er will enter the standby mode. Press the

“CD” button to start playback.

VInserting a disc in a desired position

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If

the magazine in the player has an idle po-

sition where you can insert a disc, the disc

number indicator associated with the idle

position will blink.

The positions in the magazine the indica-

tor of which steadily lights up are already

loaded with discs.

2. Press the disc select button (9) at the

position where you want to insert a disc.

3. Insert the disc when “LOAD” flashes on

the display. The disc will then be automat-

ically drawn in, and the player will begin to

play the first track on the disc.

yIf you wish to insert another disc, repeat

the procedure beginning with step 1.

If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds

after you have pressed the “LOAD” but-

ton, the player will begin to play back the

first track of the last disc you have insert-

ed.

yWhile the player is in the loading mode,

if you press “FM” or “AM” button, the play-

er will enter standby mode. Press the “CD”

button to start playback.

VLoading all the magazine (Full disc

loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”

button (10) for more than 1.5 seconds, the

player will produce beep sound and will

enter the full disc loading mode.

2. A “disc number” indicator will blink, and

“ALL LOAD” will be on display for a period

of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully

loaded during this period, the disc number

indicator will stop blinking and will steadily

light.

3. When the loading of a disc is complete,

the next disc number indicator will blink.

Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15

seconds interval, the full disc loading

mode will be canceled, and the player will

start playback of the disc inserted first.

THow to play back a CD or make a

pause

VWhen there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a

CD(s)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start

playback of the CD, beginning with the

first track.

VWhen there are CDs loaded:

Press a desired one of the disc select but-

tons (9) the disc number indicator of which

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

steadily lights up. The player will then start

playback of the selected CD, beginning

with the first track.

If a disc that the player cannot read has

been loaded, “CHECK DISC” will appear

on the display and the player will not play

anything.

TTo select a song from its beginning

VForward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE

TRACK button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the next track/file (track). Each time the

button is pressed, the indicated track/file

(track) number will increase.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last

track/file (track) will take you back to

the first track/file (track) in the folder.

VBackward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the TUNE

TRACK button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the current track/file (track). Each time

the button is pressed, the indicated track/

file (track) number will decrease.

NOTE

In an MP3 folder, skipping past the first

track/file (track) will take you to the last

track/file (track) in the folder.

TFast-forwarding and fast-reversing

VFast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (2) continuously to fast-forward the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-forward-

ing.

NOTE

If you fast-forward to the end of the last

track/file (track), fast-forwarding will

stop and the player will start playback

beginning with the first track/file

(track).

VFast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the TUNE TRACK

button (2) continuously to fast-reverse the

track/file.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

NOTE

If you fast-reverse to the beginning of

the first track/file (track), fast-reversing

will stop and the player will start play-

back.

TRepeating

VTo repeat the currently playing

track/file (track)

To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press

the “RPT” button (6) while the track/file

(track) is playing. The display will show

“RPT”, and the track/file (track) will be re-

peated.

To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play

mode, briefly press the “RPT” button

twice. The “RPT” indication will go off, and

the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

yEach time you briefly press the but-

ton, the mode will change to the next

one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the track/file (track) repeat-

play mode, press it again to reselect

the repeat-play mode.

yThe repeat-play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

yPress the disc select button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

RPT D-RPT CANCEL

5-20 Audio

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

VTo repeat the currently playing disc/

folder

To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,

press the “RPT” button (6) twice while a

track/file (track) is playing. The display will

show “D-RPT”, and the disc/folder will be

played repeatedly.

To cancel the disc/folder repeat-play

mode, press the “RPT” button once more.

The “D-RPT” indication will go off, and the

normal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE

yEach time you briefly press the but-

ton, the mode will change to the next

one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the disc/folder repeat-play

mode, press it again to reselect the

disc/folder repeat-play mode.

yThe disc/folder repeat-play mode will

be cancelled if you perform any of the

following steps:

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

yPress the disc select button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

TRandom playback

VNon-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during

disc playback to play all of the tracks on

the disc in a random order. The display will

show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel random mode, press the button

again. The “RDM” indication will go off,

and the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

Random playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

VMP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc

playback to play all of the tracks in the

folder currently being played in random or-

der. Press the “RDM” button again to play

all of the tracks on the disc in random or-

der. The display will show “RDM” during

the random mode.

To cancel the random mode, press the

“RDM” button during “in-disc” random

playback. The “RDM” indication will go off,

and the normal playback mode will be re-

sumed.

NOTE

yEach time you briefly press the but-

ton, the mode will change to the next

one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button

and cancel the random mode, press it

RPT D-RPT CANCEL

CANCEL

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

again to reselect the random mode.

yRandom playback will be cancelled if

you perform any of the following steps:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “SCAN” button

yPress the “ ” button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of

the SEEK FLDR button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position.

TSCAN

The scan mode lets you listen to the first

10 seconds of each track/file (track) in

succession. Press the “SCAN” button (7)

to start scanning upward beginning with

the track/file (track) following the currently

selected one. When all tracks/files (tracks)

in the disc/folder have been scanned, nor-

mal playback will be resumed. To cancel

the scan mode, press the button again.

NOTE

The scan mode will be cancelled if you

perform any of the following steps:

yPress the “RPT” button

yPress the “RDM” button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

TUNE TRACK button

yPress the “ ” or “ ” side of the

SEEK FLDR button (MP3 disc)

yPress the “ ” button

yPress the disc select button

ySelect the radio mode

yPress the “RSE AUX” button

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

TDisplay selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) for 0.5

second or longer during playback, the in-

dication will change to the next one in the

following sequence.

TPage (track/folder title) scroll (MP3

disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)

to select track title or folder title display,

you press the “AUDIO” button again for

less than 0.5 second, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see eight characters at a time.

NOTE

The display is designed to show titles

for up to three pages (64 characters in

total).

TFolder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “ ” side of the SEEK FLDR

button (4) briefly to select the next folder.

Pressing the “ ” side of the same button

the first time makes the player go back to

the beginning of the currently selected file;

pressing it a second time makes it go back

to the previously selected file.

NOTE

Only MP3 folders are recognized when

an attempt to select the next or previ-

ous folder is made. If no appropriate

folder exists on the disc, pressing the

“ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK FLDR

button has no effect.

THow to unload CDs from the player

VEjecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and re-

move only one disc.

1. Use the disc select button (9) to select

the disc to be ejected.

2. Briefly press the “ ” button (8). The

selected disc will be ejected. The disc

number indicator will flash at this time.

When you remove the ejected disc, the

disc number indicator will go off.

To remove more discs in succession, re-

File title Time

Folder title

5-22 Audio

peat Steps 1 and 2.

VEjecting all discs from the player

(All disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the “ ” but-

ton (8), the player will produce beep

sound and will enter the all disc ejection

mode.

2. Remove the disc that has been eject-

ed. The other discs loaded will then be

ejected one after another. If you do not re-

move the disc that has been ejected, the

“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE

yAvoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

yIf you press the “ ” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the mode will be cancelled following

ejection of the disc that is currently be-

ing ejected.

yIf you press the “CD” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,

the player will draw in the discs that

have been ejected and play them.

Audio control buttons

These buttons are located on the spokes

of the steering wheel. They allow the driv-

er to control audio functions without taking

his/her hands off the steering wheel.

TMODE button

This button is used to select the desired

audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the

mode changes to the next one in the fol-

lowing sequence:

*1: The frequency last received in the selected

waveband will be displayed.

*2: Only when a CD is in the player.

*3: Only vehicle equipped with RSE (Rear Seat

Entertainment)

T“ ” and “ ” buttons

VWith radio mode selected

Press the “ ” button or “ ” button.

The radio will seek the next receivable

station and stop on it.

That station’s frequency will be shown on

the audio display.

VWith CD mode selected

Press the “ ” button to skip forward in

the track/file (track) order. Pressing the

“ ” button the first time makes the play-

er go back to the beginning of the current

500209

AM*1

FM*1

CD*2

RSE*3

500210

Audio 5-23

– CONTINUED –

track/file (track); pressing it the second

time makes it go back to the previous

track/file (track).

The track/file (track) number will be shown

on the audio display.

TVolume control buttons

Press the “+” button to increase the vol-

ume. Press the “–” button to reduce the

volume.

A number indicating the volume will be

shown on the audio display.

TMUTE button

Press this button if you wish to immediate-

ly cut the volume to zero.

The audio display will show “MUTE”.

If you press the button again, the original

sound volume will return and “MUTE”

goes off.

NOTE

If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-

gation system, the display will show

“”.

Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and

CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the

following illustration. Also, some compact

discs cannot be played.

500211

500212

5-24 Audio

yYou cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the

player, the disc may not come out again,

possibly causing the player to malfunc-

tion.

yIn cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

form inside the CD player, preventing nor-

mal operation. If this happens, eject the

CD and wait for the player to dry out.

ySkipping may occur when the CD player

is subjected to severe vibration (for exam-

ple, when the vehicle is driven on a rough

surface).

yTo remove a disc from the case, press

the center of the case and hold both edg-

es of the disc. If the disc surface is

touched directly, contamination could

cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the

disc surface.

yUse a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft

cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thin-

ner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

yDo not use any disc that is scratched,

deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use

any disc that has a non-standard shape

(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

yA disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep

it either in places exposed to direct sun-

light, near heaters or in vehicles parked in

the sun or on hot days.

500090

500253

DualDisc

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

MP3 audio

What is MP3?

MP3 (the name is an abbreviation of

‘MPEG Audio Layer 3’) is a compression

format for digital audio. It was developed

by the Motion Picture Experts Group. It

permits audio data to be shrunk by a factor

of approximately 10 with no loss of sound

quality, meaning that the audio on 10 con-

ventional CDs can be fitted onto a single

CD-R or CD-RW (assuming a bit rate of

128 kbps and a sampling frequency of

44.1 kHz).

NOTE

yMP3 encoding and writing software

is not supplied with the audio system.

yCD writing software is not supplied

with the audio system.

Creating MP3 files

yTo create a high-quality MP3 file, it is

advisable to have a high bit rate (128 kbps

or higher) and a high sampling frequency.

yIf a file is created with a variable bit rate

(VBR), the elapsed time during playback

may not be displayed correctly and the

sound may skip.

yThe sound quality during playback de-

pends upon the encoder and bit rate. De-

tailed information can be found in the us-

er’s manuals for encoder software and

writing software.

yA fixed bit rate of 128 kbps or higher is

recommended.

Saving MP3 files on a disc

yDo not save any non-MP3 file on a disc.

Also, do not save any unnecessary folders

on a disc.

yIf many folders and/or non-MP3 files are

saved on a disc, a delay will be caused be-

fore playback begins.

yIf a disc contains both Compact Disc-

Digital Audio (CD-DA) files and MP3 files,

the system will play only the CD-DA files.

yAdd the extension ‘.MP3’ to the name of

every MP3 file. The system will not play

any file that has either no extension or an

extension other than ‘.MP3’.

yDo not add the extension ‘.MP3’ to the

name of any non-MP3 file. Doing so could

lead to speaker damage.

yThe system does not support multi-ses-

sion recording, so disc-at-once recording

is recommended.

yThe system does not support packet

writing software.

yThe system does not have a playlist

function.

yThe system may not be able to display

and play certain MP3 files depending on

500034

5-26 Audio

the writing software and CD recorder.

yRecording must be performed using a

file system supported by the audio sys-

tem. Otherwise, the audio system may not

play the MP3 files and may not display

folder titles and file titles.

Supported file systems

The audio system supports the following

file systems:

yISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2

yApple Extension to ISO 9660

yJoliet

yRomeo

NOTE

The audio system does not support the

following file systems:

yApple HFS

yUDF 1.50

yMix CD (CD Extra)

Compression format

yMPEG 1 audio layer 3 (MP3)

Bit rate: 32 kbps – 320 kbps

Sampling frequency: 32, 44.1, 48 kHz

yMPEG 2 audio layer 3 (MP3)

Bit rate: 8 kbps – 160 kbps

Sampling frequency: 16, 22.05, 24 kHz

Numbers of folders and files

yMaximum number of folders: 255 (in-

cluding root folder)

yMaximum number of files: 999 (maxi-

mum number in one folder: 255)

yMaximum number of layers: 8

NOTE

yNot all of the discs stored in MP3

files may be able to be played back.

yEven if a folder contains no MP3

files, it is counted as a folder.

yWriting software can rearrange fold-

ers and files such that the playback or-

der is different from the desired one.

yThe playback order for a given disc

can be different with different players.

Copyright issues

Except with respect to copies made for

personal use, duplication, distribution, and

transmission of music and other copy-

righted material on a disc without permis-

sion from the copyright holder is illegal.

Interior equipment

Interior light ........................................................ 6-2

Dome light ............................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light ...................................................... 6-2

Map light ............................................................. 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Sun visor extension plate ...................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror with light ........................................... 6-4

Storage compartment ........................................ 6-4

Glove box ................................................................ 6-4

Center console box ................................................ 6-5

Rear console ........................................................... 6-6

Overhead console .................................................. 6-6

Cup holder .......................................................... 6-6

Front passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-7

Rear seat (5-seater models)/Second-row seat

(7-seater models) passenger’s cup holder ........ 6-7

Third-row seat cup holders (7-seater models) ..... 6-8

Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-8

Coat hook ............................................................ 6-10

Rear (5-seater models)/Second-row (7-seater

models) passenger area ...................................... 6-10

Shopping bag hook ............................................ 6-11

Floor mat ............................................................. 6-11

Convenient tie-down hooks .............................. 6-12

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-12

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if

equipped) ......................................................... 6-13

Garage door opener programming in the

U.S.A. ..................................................................... 6-14

Programming rolling-code-protected garage

door openers in the U.S.A. .................................. 6-15

Programming for entrance gates and garage

door openers in Canada ...................................... 6-16

Programming other devices .................................. 6-17

Operating the HomeLink® Wireless Control

System ................................................................... 6-17

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button ...... 6-17

Erasing HomeLink® button memory .................... 6-17

In case a problem occurs ....................................... 6-17

6-2 Interior equipment

Interior equipm ent

Interior light

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertain-

ment

The light switch has three positions:

1: The light stays on continuously.

2: The light comes on when any door is

opened. The light remains on for several

seconds and gradually goes out after all

doors are closed.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. See

the “Remote keyless entry system” in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

3: The light stays off.

Cargo area light

The cargo area light switch has three po-

sitions:

DOOR: The light comes on only when the

rear gate is opened.

Middle position: The light stays off.

: The light stays on continuously.

600403

123

600404

600405

Interior equipment 6-3

– CONTINUED –

Map light

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the remote keyless entry transmitter. See

the “Remote keyless entry system” in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

The setting of the period for which the light

stays on can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun visor exten-

sion plate to prevent glare through the gap

between the sun visor and center pillar. To

use the extension plate, pull it toward the

rear of the vehicle. When you have fin-

ished using it, stow it by pushing it toward

the front of the vehicle.

600406 400228

600407

6-4 Interior equipment

Vanity mirror with light

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cov-

er.

The light beside the vanity mirror comes

on when the mirror cover is opened.

Storage compartment

Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would obstruct your view of the

rearview mirror.

600408

600409

yAlways keep the storage compart-

ment closed while driving to re-

duce the risk of injury in the event

of sudden stops or an accident.

yDo not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compartment.

600410

Interior equipment 6-5

– CONTINUED –

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise.

Center console box

The center console box has a two-layer

structure consisting of an upper compart-

ment and a lower compartment.

TUpper compartment

1) Upper compartment lock release

Pull up the upper compartment lock re-

lease to open the upper compartment.

TLower compartment

1) Lower compartment lock release

Pull up the lower compartment lock re-

lease to open the lower compartment.

600411

600412

600413

6-6 Interior equipment

Rear console

The rear console is located in the back of

the center console box. Pull it out to use it.

Overhead console

To open the console, push on the lid light-

ly and it will automatically open. Cup holder

600414

600415

When your vehicle is parked in the

sun or on a warm day, the inside of

the overhead console heats up.

Avoid storing plastic or other heat-

vulnerable or flammable articles

such as a lighter in the overhead

console.

yWhen not in use, always keep the

cup holder stored while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an acci-

dent.

yDo not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

yTake care to avoid spills. Bever-

ages, if hot, might burn you or

your passengers. Spilled bever-

ages may also damage upholstery

or carpets.

Interior equipment 6-7

– CONTINUED –

Front passenger’s cup holder

TCenter console

The dual cup holder is built into the center

console near the parking brake lever.

To access the cup holder, push the re-

lease button.

TDoor pocket

The door pockets can be used to hold

beverage bottles and other items.

Rear seat (5-seater models)/

Second-row seat (7-seater

models) passenger’s cup

holder

TArmrest

A dual cup holder is built in the armrest.

600416

600417

When placing a beverage in a door

pocket, make sure it is capped. Oth-

erwise, the beverage could spill

when opening/closing the door or

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

600418

When a cup containing a beverage

is in the cup holder, do not slide or

recline any seat. Otherwise, the bev-

erage could spill while driving and,

if the beverage is hot, it could scald

you.

600419

6-8 Interior equipment

TDoor pocket

The door pockets can be used to hold

beverage bottles and other items.

Third-row seat cup holders

(7-seater models)

A cup holder is located at each side of the

third-row seat.

Accessory power outlets

Accessory power outlets are provided in

the center console (lower compartment)

and in the cargo area.

When placing a beverage in a door

pocket, make sure it is capped. Oth-

erwise, the beverage could spill

when opening/closing the door or

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

600420

When placing a beverage in a cup

holder, make sure it is capped. Oth-

erwise, the beverage could spill

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

600421 600422

600423

Interior equipment 6-9

– CONTINUED –

Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery

is available at any of the outlets when the

ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

You can use an in-car use electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

When both outlets are used at the same

time, the total power consumption of the

electric appliances must be 120W or less.

NOTE

It is possible, when using the outlet in

the center console (lower compart-

ment) with the lid closed, to pass the

electrical appliance’s cord through a

yDo not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlet.

yDo not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the accesso-

ry power outlet when it is not in

use.

yUse only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC

and which consume less than

120W. Overloading the accessory

power outlet can cause a short

circuit. Do not use double adapt-

ers or more than one electrical ap-

pliance.

yIf the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power out-

let, this can result in a poor con-

tact or cause the plug to get stuck.

Only use plugs that fit properly.

yUse of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery dis-

charge.

yBefore driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and

brake pedals. If they do, do not

use the electrical appliance while

driving.

600424

600425

6-10 Interior equipment

gap between the center console (lower

compartment) and the lid. It is also

possible to pass the cord through a

groove in the lid and up to the center

console (upper compartment).

Coat hook

Rear (5-seater models)/Sec-

ond-row (7-seater models)

passenger area

600516

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by pre-

venting correct airbag deployment.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no

pointed objects in the pockets.

Hang clothing directly on the coat

hooks without using hangers.

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driv-

er’s view or that could cause injury

in sudden stops or in a collision.

And do not hang items on the coat

hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or

more.

Interior equipment 6-11

– CONTINUED –

A coat hook is attached to each of the pas-

senger hand grips for the seat listed in the

following.

y5-seater models: Rear seat

y7-seater models: Second seat

Shopping bag hook

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s

side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler

door release. Fit the grommet in the car-

pet onto the pin to prevent the carpet from

moving.

400249

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or

more.

600487

600497

6-12 Interior equipment

Convenient tie-down hooks

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses. When

not in use, put the hooks up into the stor-

ing recesses.

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

The subfloor storage compartment is lo-

cated under the floor of the cargo area

and can be used to store small items. To

open the lid, pull the handle up.

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is

placed back in its proper location

and correctly secured on its retain-

ing pin. If the floor mat slips forward

and interferes with the movement of

the pedals during driving, it could

cause an accident.

600427

The convenient tie-down hooks are

designed only for securing light car-

go. Never try to secure cargo that

exceeds the capacity of the hooks.

The maximum load capacity is 44

lbs (20 kg) per hook.

600428

yAlways keep the lid of the sub-

floor storage compartment closed

while driving to reduce the risk of

injury in the event of sudden stop

or an accident.

yDo not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the subfloor storage com-

partment.

Interior equipment 6-13

– CONTINUED –

T5-seater models

Hang the hook provided on the underside

of the rear half lid on the rear edge of the

roof to keep the lid open.

T7-seater models

Hang the hook provided on the underside

of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to

keep the lid open.

HomeLink® Wireless Control

System (if equipped)

1) HomeLink® buttons

2) Indicator light

3) Hand-held transmitter*

* Not part of your vehicle’s keyless entry

system but of a HomeLink®-compatible

device.

The HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-

tem, located on the driver’s sun visor, is a

handy way to operate, from inside of your

vehicle, up to three remote-controlled in-

door and outdoor devices, such as garage

door openers, entrance gates, door locks,

home lighting, and security systems.

There are three HomeLink® buttons on

the sun visor, each of which you can pro-

600488

600436

600518

600429

6-14 Interior equipment

gram for operation of one desired device.

For details on the device types which can

be operated by this system, consult the

HomeLink website at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

Note the following about this system:

If your vehicle is equipped with the

HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it

complies with Part 15 of the Federal Com-

munication Commission Rules in the U.S.

and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada in

Canada. Its operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Changes and modifications to this system

by anyone other than an authorized ser-

vice facility could void authorization to use

this equipment.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house are

registered trademarks of Johnson Con-

trols, Inc.

NOTE

yAfter programming your HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for the de-

sired devices, retain the hand-held

transmitters for further programming

or device testing in the event of a prob-

lem.

yIt is recommended that you insert a

new battery in the hand-held transmit-

ter of a device to ensure correct pro-

gramming.

Garage door opener pro-

gramming in the U.S.A.

NOTE

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for a garage

door opener, it is suggested that you

park the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage door

opener from the outlet.

yWhen programming the

HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a ga-

rage door opener or other device.

Make sure that people and objects

are out of the way of the garage

door opener or other device to

prevent potential harm or dam-

age.

yDo not use the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control System with any ga-

rage door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature as

required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and re-

verse, does not meet these safety

standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases risk of serious injury or

death. For more information, con-

sult the HomeLink website at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-

355-3515.

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System to operate

a garage door opener or an entrance

gate, unplug the device’s motor

from the outlet during programming

to prevent motor burnout.

Interior equipment 6-15

– CONTINUED –

2. Press and hold the two outside

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light

begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Re-

lease both buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are al-

ready programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the mem-

ory of all the three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the garage door open-

er’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and

3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s sun vi-

sor, keeping the indicator light in view.

4. Using both hands, simultaneously

push the hand-held transmitter button and

the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT

release the buttons until step 5 has been

completed.

5. Hold down both buttons until the

HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first

slowly then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-

cates successful programming of the new

frequency signal.)

6. Press and hold the programmed button

and check the HomeLink® indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on continuously,

your garage door should activate and the

programming is completed.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two

seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be protect-

ed by a rolling code feature. In this case

you need to perform the additional steps

for “Programming rolling-code-protected

garage door openers in the U.S.A.” de-

scribed in the following.

NOTE

Rolling-code-protected garage door

openers are manufactured after 1996.

See the instruction manual of your ga-

rage opener for confirmation.

7. Reconnect the motor of your garage

door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your garage door opener by

pressing the programmed HomeLink®

button.

Programming rolling-code-

protected garage door open-

ers in the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rolling

code feature, program the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for it by following

steps 1 through 5 in the “Programming ga-

rage door openers in the U.S.A.” section

above and then continuing with the steps

below.

NOTE

The assistance of a second person

600430 600431

6-16 Interior equipment

may make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on the ga-

rage door opener motor head unit. The ex-

act location and color of the button may

vary by brand of garage door opener. If it

is difficult to locate the training button, re-

fer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

tion manual.

1) Training button

2. Press the training button on the garage

door opener motor head unit (which acti-

vates the “training light” on the unit). Pro-

ceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.

3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and re-

lease the HomeLink® button that was pro-

grammed in the section above. Press and

release the button a second time to com-

plete the programming procedure.

NOTE

Some garage door openers may re-

quire you to do the above procedure a

third time to complete the program-

ming.

4. The garage door opener should now

recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Con-

trol System and your garage door opener

should activate when the HomeLink® but-

ton is pressed.

Programming for entrance

gates and garage door open-

ers in Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate

or garage door opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the HomeLink® indicator light begins

to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both

buttons.

NOTE

If any of the HomeLink® buttons are al-

ready programmed for other devices,

skip step 2 because it clears the mem-

600432

600433

600430

Interior equipment 6-17

– CONTINUED –

ory of all three buttons.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/ga-

rage door opener’s hand-held transmitter

between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm)

away from the HomeLink® buttons on the

driver’s sun visor, keeping the indicator

light in view.

4. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button.

5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-

held transmitter button every two seconds

until step 6 is complete.

6. When the indicator light flashes slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds, re-

lease both buttons.

7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/ga-

rage door opener to the outlet.

8. Test your entrance gate/garage door

opener by pressing the programmed

HomeLink® button.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as door

locks, home lighting and security systems,

contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

Operating the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System

Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-

less Control System can be used to re-

mote-control the devices to which its but-

tons are programmed. To activate a de-

vice, simply press the appropriate button.

The indicator light illuminates, indicating

that the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button

1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button

you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release

the button until step 4 has been complet-

ed.

2. When the HomeLink® indicator light

begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds),

position the hand-held transmitter of the

device for which you wish to program the

button at 1 to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) away

from the HomeLink® button surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmit-

ter button. The HomeLink® indicator light

will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.

The programming for the previous device

is now erased and the new device can be

operated by pushing the HomeLink® but-

ton.

Erasing HomeLink® button

memory

NOTE

yPerforming this procedure erases

the memory of all the preprogrammed

buttons simultaneously. The memory

of individual buttons cannot be erased.

yIt is recommended that upon the sale

of the vehicle, the memory of all pro-

grammed HomeLink® buttons be

erased for security purposes.

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons

until the indicator light begins to flash (af-

ter 20 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

In case a problem occurs

If you cannot activate a device using the

600434

6-18 Interior equipment

corresponding HomeLink® button after

programming, contact HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515 for assistance.

Starting and operating

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2

Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-2

Fuel filler lid and cap .............................................. 7-3

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................... 7-5

Preparing to drive .............................................. 7-6

Starting the engine ............................................. 7-7

Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-8

Automatic transmission .................................... 7-8

Selector lever .......................................................... 7-9

Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ............ 7-10

Selection of manual mode ..................................... 7-11

Maximum speeds .................................................... 7-12

Driving tips .............................................................. 7-13

SPORT mode ........................................................... 7-13

Shift lock release .................................................... 7-14

Power steering ................................................... 7-15

Braking ................................................................ 7-15

Braking tips ............................................................. 7-15

Brake system .......................................................... 7-15

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .............. 7-16

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................... 7-16

ABS system self-check .......................................... 7-17

ABS warning light ................................................... 7-17

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system .............................................................. 7-18

Steps to take if EBD system fails .......................... 7-18

Vehicle Dynamics Control system ................... 7-19

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-21

Traction Control system OFF switch .................... 7-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........ 7-24

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-25

Cruise control ..................................................... 7-27

To set cruise control .............................................. 7-27

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-28

To turn off the cruise control ................................. 7-28

To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-28

Cruise control indicator light ................................. 7-29

Cruise control set indicator light .......................... 7-30

7-2 Starting and operating

Starting an d operating

Fuel

Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using

premium unleaded gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of 91 AKI or higher. If premium

unleaded gasoline is not available, regular

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used.

For optimum engine performance and

driveability, it is recommended that you

use premium grade unleaded gasoline.

TFuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rat-

ing can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-

times knocks lightly when you drive up a

hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

TUnleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

TCalifornia fuel

If your vehicle was certified to California

Emission Standards as indicated on the

underhood tune-up label, it is designed to

optimize engine and emission control sys-

tem performance with gasoline that meets

the clean burning low-sulfur California

gasoline specifications. If you live in any

other state than California, your vehicle

will operate on gasoline meeting Federal

specifications. Gasoline sold outside Cali-

fornia is permitted to have higher sulfur

levels, which may affect the performance

of your vehicle’s catalytic converter and

may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service. The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/Malfunction indicator lamp may also

turn on. If this occurs, return to your autho-

rized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis. If it is

determined that the condition is caused by

the type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

TMMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is deter-

mined that the condition is caused by the

type of fuel used, repairs may not be cov-

ered by your warranty.

TGasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent addi-

tives will help prevent deposits from form-

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel addi-

tive may cause engine damage.

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

ing in your engine and fuel system. This

helps keep your engine in tune and your

emission control system working properly,

and is a way of doing your part for cleaner

air. If you continuously use a high quality

fuel with the proper detergent and other

additives, you should never need to add

any fuel system cleaning agents to your

fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with ma-

terials called oxygenates. Use of these fu-

els can also help keep the air cleaner. Ox-

ygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Me-

thyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl

or grain alcohol) may be used in your ve-

hicle, but should contain no more than

15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper

operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station oper-

ators if their gasolines contain detergents

and oxygenates and if they have been re-

formulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

yFuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

yMethanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi-

cient quantities of the proper cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors required to pre-

vent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT un-

der these conditions.

yIf undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

yFuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of im-

proper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler lid and cap

TRefueling

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid re-

lease lever. The lever is on the floor at the

left of the driver’s seat.

700301

700302

7-4 Starting and operating

2. Open the fuel filler lid.

1) Open

2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically clicks off. Do not add

any more fuel.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

yYou will see the “ ” sign in the

fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler door (lid) is located on the right

side of the vehicle.

yIf the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light may come on. Refer to

the “Warning and indicator lights” sec-

tion located in chapter 3.

700303

700304

yGasoline vapor is highly flamma-

ble. Before refueling, always first

stop the engine and make sure

that there are no lighted ciga-

rettes, open flames or electrical

sparks in the adjacent area.

yWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. Fuel may be

under pressure and spray out of

the fuel filler neck especially in

hot weather, which may cause in-

jury.

yNever add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause dam-

age to the fuel system.

200253

Starting and operating 7-5

– CONTINUED –

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

At state inspection time, remember to

tell your inspection or service station

in advance not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-

mometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

Some states have started using dyna-

mometers in their state inspection pro-

grams in order to meet their obligation un-

der federal law to implement stricter vehi-

cle emission standards to reduce air pollu-

tion from vehicles. A dynamometer is a

treadmill or roller-like testing device that

allows your vehicle’s wheels to turn while

the vehicle remains in one place. Depend-

ing on the severity of a state’s air pollution

problems, the states must adopt either a

“basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission in-

spection test. Normally, a portion of the

basic emission test consists of an emis-

sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe

into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle

for a short period of time. States with more

severe air pollution problems are required

to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission

test. This test simulates actual driving

conditions on a dynamometer and permits

more accurate measurement of tailpipe

emitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-

cy (EPA) and states using two-wheel dy-

namometers in their emission testing pro-

grams have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD

vehicles from the portion of the testing

program that involves a two-wheel dyna-

mometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel

dynamometers in their testing programs.

When properly used, that equipment will

not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.

yMake sure that the cap is tight-

ened until it clicks to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

yDo not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels may

cause paint damage, which is not

covered under the SUBARU Limit-

ed Warranty.

yAlways use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong

cap, it may not fit or have proper

venting, and your fuel tank and

emission control system might be

damaged.

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehi-

cle must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in un-

controlled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

Resultant vehicle damage due to im-

proper testing is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty and

is the responsibility of the state in-

spection program or its contractors

or licensees.

7-6 Starting and operating

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regulations for in-

specting the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)

system as part of the state emissions in-

spection. The OBD system is designed to

detect engine and transmission problems

that might cause vehicle emissions to ex-

ceed allowable limits. These inspections

apply to all 1996 model year and newer

passenger cars and light trucks. Over 30

states plus the District of Columbia have

implemented the OBD system inspection.

yThe inspection of the OBD system con-

sists of a visual operational check of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunc-

tion indicator lamp (MIL) and an examina-

tion of the OBD system with an electronic

scan tool while the engine is running.

yA vehicle passes the OBD system in-

spection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”

warning light/MIL illumination is observed,

there is no stored diagnostic trouble

codes, and the OBD system readiness

monitors are complete.

yA vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is

not properly operating or there is one or

more diagnostic trouble codes stored in

vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK EN-

GINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.

yA state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBD system readiness monitors “Not

Ready” is greater than one. Under this

condition, the vehicle operator should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to set the monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

yOwners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition of

the tires. Also check tires for proper infla-

tion.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning and

indicator lights when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting and operating 7-7

Starting the engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position). The

starter will only operate when the select

lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and check the operation of the warn-

ing and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately af-

ter the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the follow-

ing.

1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and wait for at least 10 sec-

onds. After checking that the parking

brake is firmly set, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position while de-

pressing the accelerator pedal slightly

(approximately a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator pedal

as soon as the engine starts.

2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch back to the “OFF” posi-

tion and wait for at least 10 seconds.

Then fully depress the accelerator ped-

al and turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine starts,

quickly release the accelerator pedal.

3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi-

tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or

longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

4)If the engine still refuses to start, con-

tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone out after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the en-

gine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

yDo not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than ten

seconds. If the engine fails to start

after operating the starter for five

to ten seconds, wait for ten sec-

onds or more before trying again.

yIf you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the selec-

tor lever into the “N” position. Do

not attempt to place the selector

lever of a moving vehicle into the

“P” position.

7-8 Starting and operating

Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 5 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has

a manual mode and a SPORT mode.

NOTE

yWhen the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s automat-

ic transmission will up-shift at higher

engine speeds than when the coolant

temperature is sufficiently high in or-

der to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

yImmediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, you

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

which the on-board computer has col-

lected and stored in memory to allow

Do not stop the engine when the ve-

hicle is moving. This will cause loss

of power to the power steering and

the brake booster, making steering

and braking more difficult. It could

also result in accidental activation

of the “LOCK” position on the igni-

tion switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

Do not shift from the “P” or “N” po-

sition into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle to

jump forward or backward.

yShift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is complete-

ly stopped. Shifting while the ve-

hicle is moving may cause dam-

age to the transmission.

yDo not race the engine for more

than five seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

yAvoid shifting from one of the for-

ward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until the

vehicle has completely stopped.

Such shifting may cause damage

to the transmission.

yWhen parking the vehicle, first se-

curely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position. Avoid parking

for a long time with the selector le-

ver in any other position as doing

so could result in a dead battery.

Starting and operating 7-9

– CONTINUED –

the transmission to shift at the most

appropriate times for the current con-

dition of your vehicle. Optimized shift-

ing will be restored as the vehicle con-

tinues to be driven for a while.

Selector lever

: With the brake pedal depressed,

shift while pressing the button in.

: Shift while pressing the button in.

: Shift without pressing the button.

The selector lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for

using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.

TP (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

any other position, you have to depress

the brake pedal fully then push the release

button on the selector lever when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position. This

prevents the vehicle from lurching when it

is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, the release button pushed in,

and the ignition switch in the ON position,

refer to the “Shift lock release” section in

this chapter.

NOTE

To protect the engine while the “P” po-

sition is selected, the engine is con-

trolled such that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

TR (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop

the vehicle completely then move the le-

ver to the “R” position while pushing the

release button.

TN (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled en-

gine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is on.

Avoid coasting with the transmission neu-

tral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

NOTE

yTo protect the engine while the “N”

position is selected, the engine is con-

trolled such that the engine speed

does not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

yIf the selector lever is in the “N” po-

sition when you stop the engine for

parking, you may not subsequently be

able to move it to the “R” and “P” posi-

tions. If this happens, turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. You will

then be able to move the selector lever

to the “P” position.

700305

7-10 Starting and operating

TD (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you re-

lease the pedal, the transmission will re-

turn to the original gear position.

To use the SPORT mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate.

To use the manual mode, move the lever

from this position into the manual gate

then move it toward the “+” and “–” ends.

VWhile climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to

4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking

place when the accelerator is released.

This minimizes the chance of subsequent

downshifting to a lower gear when accel-

erating again. This prevents repeated up-

shifting and downshifting resulting in a

smoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTE

The transmission may downshift to

2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way

the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac-

celerate the vehicle again.

VWhile going down a hill

When you are descending a hill or any

other slope while braking with the

“SPORT” mode selected, the transmis-

sion may downshift to 4th or 3rd gear de-

pending on how hard you depress the

brake pedal, causing engine braking to

work. Reacceleration for a short time will

cause the transmission to upshift normal-

ly.

NOTE

yA 5th-to-4th automatic downshift will

not occur at speeds above 78 mph (126

km/h) and a 4th-to-3rd automatic down-

shift will not occur at speeds above 53

mph (86 km/h).

yAutomatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd

may occur even when driving on a level

road depending on conditions, such as

how hard you depress the brake pedal.

Selector lever reverse inhibit-

ing function

This function prevents accidental move-

ment of the selector lever to the “R” posi-

tion while the vehicle is moving.

The function becomes operational when

the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once operation-

al, it prevents the selector lever from being

moved from the “N” position to the “R” po-

sition. When the vehicle speed drops be-

low 6 mph (10 km/h), the function is can-

celed. The selector lever can then be

moved to the “R” and “P” positions.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “OFF” position, movement of the se-

lector lever from the “N” position to the “R”

position is possible for a limited time peri-

od and then becomes impossible. Also,

the selector lever cannot be moved to the

“R” position when it has been placed in the

“P” position and then placed again in the

“N” position. When movement of the se-

lector lever from the “N” position to the “R”

position has become impossible, turn the

ignition switch back to the “ON” position

then move the selector lever to the “P” po-

sition. Pressing the selector lever release

button also makes it possible to move the

selector lever to the “P” position at this

time.

Do not drive the vehicle with the se-

lector lever in the “N” (neutral) posi-

tion. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition and the risk of an ac-

cident is consequently increased.

Starting and operating 7-11

– CONTINUED –

TSelector lever release button

If you inadvertently have turned the igni-

tion switch to the “OFF” position with the

selector lever in the “N” position, proceed

as follows. By referring to the “Shift lock

release” section in this chapter, remove

the cover. Then, with a screwdriver insert-

ed into the hole, move the selector lever to

the “P” position while pressing the release

button. If the selector lever reverse inhibit-

ing function fails, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the selector lever from the “D”

position to the manual gate then move it to

the “+” end or “–” end of the manual gate

to select manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator in the ta-

chometer come on. The gear position indi-

cator shows the currently selected gear in

the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The upshift and

downshift indicators show when a gear-

shift is possible. When the upshift indica-

tor “ ” is on, upshifting is possible.

When the downshift indicator “ ” is on,

downshifting is possible. When both indi-

cators are on, upshifting and downshifting

are both possible. When the vehicle stops

(for example, at traffic signals), the down-

shift indicator goes off.

700306 700307

700308

7-12 Starting and operating

Gearshifts can be performed using the se-

lector lever.

Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly

pushing the selector lever toward the “+”

end of the manual gate.

Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly pull-

ing the selector lever toward the “–” end of

the manual gate.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

yWhen the temperature of the engine

oil is higher than normal, warning

beeps are emitted and the shift posi-

tion indicator shows “–”. If these warn-

ings are issued, deselect the manual

mode to protect the engine from dam-

age.

yThe transmission does not automati-

cally shift up in the manual mode. Per-

form gearshifts in accordance with

road conditions so that the tachometer

needle does not enter the red zone. If

the engine speed reaches a predeter-

mined level, a fuel-cut function will op-

erate. Shift up if this happens. Also, the

transmission may automatically shift

up to protect the engine.

yIf you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

yIf you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

yYou can perform a skip-shift (for ex-

ample, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the selector lever twice in rapid suc-

cession.

yThe transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

yIf the temperature of the automatic

transmission fluid becomes too high,

the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will

come on and upshifts to 5th gear will

not be possible. Immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe place and let the en-

gine idle until the warning light goes

off.

Maximum speeds

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When down shifting, it is important to con-

firm that the current vehicle speed is not in

excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed

700309

When down shifting, ensure that the

vehicle is not travelling at a speed

exceeding the Maximum Allowable

Speed for the gear which is about to

be selected. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to engine over-

revving and this in turn can result in

engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine braking caused by down

shifting when the vehicle is travel-

ling on a slippery surface can lead to

wheel locking; as a consequence,

control of the vehicle may be lost

and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

Starting and operating 7-13

– CONTINUED –

of the gear which is about to be selected.

Never exceed posted speed limits.

NOTE

yIn order to prevent over-revving dur-

ing acceleration of the vehicle, the

transmission will automatically shift to

the next highest gear if the Maximum

Allowable Speed for the current gear is

exceeded.

ySimilarly, in order to prevent over-

revving during deceleration of the vehi-

cle, the transmission will remain in the

current gear if the speed of the vehicle

is in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed for the gear to which the selec-

tor lever has been moved.

Driving tips

yOn a road surface where there is a risk

of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or

gravel-covered road), you can pull away

from a standstill safely and easily by first

selecting the 2nd gear of the manual

mode.

yAlways apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

yAlways set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehi-

cle with only the transmission.

yDo not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D” position. Use the brake instead.

yThe engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does not indicate a

problem.

yA slight reduction in output torque may

occur before the engine warms up.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode is used when power is

needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill

driving. To select this mode, move the se-

lector lever from the “D” position to the

manual gate.

Position mph (km/h)

1 25 (40)

2 59 (95)

3 95 (153)

700310

700311

7-14 Starting and operating

When selected, the SPORT mode indica-

tor light on the instrument panel will turn

on.

To deselect SPORT mode, move the se-

lector lever to the “D” position or select

manual mode. To subsequently reselect

SPORT mode, move the selector lever to

the “D” position and from there to the man-

ual gate.

In this mode, the transmission shifts up at

higher vehicle speeds and shifts down

more responsively than in normal mode.

Shift lock release

Perform the following steps if the selector

lever does not move from the “P” position

even with the release button pressed, the

brake pedal depressed and the ignition

switch in the “ON” position:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the en-

gine.

2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool

bag.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with a flat-head screwdriver.

4. Insert a screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position while pressing the release

button.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the en-

gine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system re-

paired.

700312

700313

Starting and operating 7-15

– CONTINUED –

Power steering

The power steering system operates only

when the engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is nor-

mal. It does not indicate power steering

system trouble.

Braking

Braking tips

TWhen the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a re-

sult, brake stopping distance will be long-

er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at

a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

TUse of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

TBraking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driv-

ing straight ahead while gradually reduc-

ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to

a safe place.

Brake system

TTwo separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake sys-

tem. Each circuit works diagonally across

the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake sys-

tem should fail, the other half of the sys-

tem still works. If one circuit fails, the

brake pedal will go down much closer to

the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

TBrake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. If engine

manifold vacuum becomes insufficient,

such as when driving in a high-altitude

place, a vacuum pump assures a suffi-

cient vacuum to operate the brake boost-

er. Do not turn off the engine while driving

because that will turn off the brake boost-

er, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than five seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

7-16 Starting and operating

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to push the pedal much harder

than normal and the braking distance will

increase.

NOTE

Some sound accompanying operation

of the vacuum pump may be heard

from the engine compartment during

driving. This does not indicate a fault.

Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, imme-

diately have your vehicle inspected by the

nearest SUBARU dealer. ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

700040

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with an ABS equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

yThe ABS system does not always

decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe fol-

lowing distance from other vehi-

cles.

yWhen driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy road, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be longer

for a vehicle with the ABS system

than one without. When driving

under these conditions, therefore,

reduce your speed and leave am-

ple distance from other vehicles.

Starting and operating 7-17

– CONTINUED –

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of

wheels which may occur during sudden

braking or braking on slippery road surfac-

es. This helps prevent the loss of steering

control and directional stability caused by

wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating sound of

ABS from the engine compartment just af-

ter the vehicle is started. This is caused by

an automatic functional test of the ABS

system being carried out and does not in-

dicate any abnormal condition.

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion and goes out after approximately two

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following, the ABS sys-

tem may be considered normal.

yThe warning light comes on right af-

ter the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

yThe warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

yThe warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately

and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

yWhen you feel the ABS system

operating, you should maintain

constant brake pedal pressure.

Do not pump the brake pedal

since doing so may defeat the op-

eration of the ABS system.

If the warning light behaves as fol-

lows, the ABS system may not be

working properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

700314

yThe warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

yThe warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, but it does not go

out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

yThe warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system

repaired at the first available oppor-

tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

7-18 Starting and operating

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS system and uses some of the ABS

system’s components to perform its func-

tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-

ing force. If any of the ABS components

used by the EBD function fails, the EBD

system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

Steps to take if EBD system

fails

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously during driv-

ing.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are ap-

plied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

700315

Starting and operating 7-19

– CONTINUED –

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system in-

spected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In-

stead, have the vehicle towed to the near-

est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

yDriving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

yIf at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics

Control system equipped vehicle

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

yEven if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control,

winter tires or snow chains

should be used when driving on

snow-covered or icy roads; in ad-

dition, vehicle speed should be re-

duced considerably. Simply hav-

ing a Vehicle Dynamics Control

system does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

7-20 Starting and operating

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system ad-

justs the engine’s output and the wheels’

respective braking forces to help maintain

traction and directional control.

yTraction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

steady illumination of the Vehicle Dynam-

ics Control operation indicator light.

ySkid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

NOTE

ySlight twitching of the brake pedal

may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system operates; a small de-

gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-

ing may also be noticed in this situa-

tion. These are normal characteristics

of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

and are no cause for alarm.

yWhen driving off immediately after

starting the engine, a short-lived oper-

ation noise may be noticed coming

from the engine compartment. This

noise is generated as a result of a

check being performed on the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and is nor-

mal.

yDepending on the timing of activa-

tion of the brakes, certain situations

may occur just after driving off where

the brake pedal seems to exhibit a jolt-

ing motion. This too is a consequence

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tional check and is normal.

yIn the circumstances listed in the fol-

lowing, the vehicle may be more unsta-

ble than it feels to the driver. The Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation does

not indicate a system fault.

yon gravel-covered or rutted roads

yon unfinished roads

ywhen the vehicle is towing a trailer

ywhen the vehicle is fitted with

yActivation of the Vehicle Dynam-

ics Control system is an indica-

tion that the road being travelled

on has a slippery surface; since

having Vehicle Dynamics Control

is no guarantee that full vehicle

control will be maintained at all

times and under all conditions, its

activation should be seen as a

sign that the speed of the vehicle

should be reduced considerably.

yWhenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or an

axle are removed from a vehicle

equipped with Vehicle Dynamics

Control, have an authorized

SUBARU dealer perform an in-

spection of that system.

yThe following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size, type,

and brand. Furthermore, the

amount of wear should be the

same for all four tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the

driver’s side door pillar.

Starting and operating 7-21

– CONTINUED –

snow tires or winter tires

yActivation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly dif-

ferent compared to that for normal con-

ditions.

yEven if the vehicle is equipped with a

Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it is

important that winter tires be used

when driving on snow-covered or icy

roads. (All four wheels should be fitted

with tires of the same size and brand).

Furthermore, if snow chains are to be

used, they should be fitted on the front

wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with

snow chains, however, the effective-

ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this should be

taken into account when driving the ve-

hicle in such a condition.

yIt is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with Ve-

hicle Dynamics Control.

yAll four wheels should be fitted with

tires of the same size, type, and brand;

furthermore, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four tires. If

these precautions are not observed

and non-matching tires are used, it is

quite possible that the Vehicle Dynam-

ics Control system will be unable to op-

erate correctly as intended.

yAlways turn off the engine before re-

placing a tire as failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

TVehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

The indicator light turns on when the igni-

tion key is turned to the ON position; it

turns off approximately two seconds later.

This indicator light flashes during activa-

tion of the skid suppression function and is

illuminated steadily during activation of

the traction control function.

The following two situations could indicate

a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system; if either should occur,

have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry

out an inspection of that system at the first

available opportunity.

yThe indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition key is turned to the ON

position.

yThe indicator light does not turn off ap-

proximately two seconds after the ignition

key has been turned to the ON position.

TVehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Traction Control system OFF

indicator light

This single light has the function of indicat-

ing malfunctions in the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the function of indicat-

700316

700317

7-22 Starting and operating

ing that the Traction Control system is not

operating. It comes on in the event of a

malfunction in the system and is illuminat-

ed whenever the system is not operating.

VVehicle Dynamics Control warning

The warning light comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position

and goes off several seconds after engine

startup. This lighting pattern indicates that

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

operating normally.

The following situations could indicate a

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system; if any should occur, we rec-

ommend that you have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

the system at the first available opportuni-

ty.

yThe warning light does not turn on when

the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion.

yThe warning light turns on while the ve-

hicle is being driven.

yWhen a malfunction has occurred in the

Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical sys-

tem, only the warning light will turn on. In

such an event, the ABS will still be operat-

ing normally.

yThe warning light will also turn on when

a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle

Dynamics Control electronic control sys-

tems.

Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system controls each brake through the

ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating

due to a malfunction in that electrical sys-

tem, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will

also become unable to control all four

brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control

system operation halts and the warning

light turns on. Although both the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system and the ABS

will be inoperable in this situation, it will

still be possible to stop the vehicle using

normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and the ABS do not ad-

versely affect operation of the vehicle in

any way when they are inoperable; how-

ever should such a situation occur, drive

with care and have an authorized

SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of

those systems at the first available oppor-

tunity.

NOTE

When the warning light turns on and

off in the following way, it indicates

that the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is operating normally.

yAlthough turning on after the engine

has been started, the warning light

quickly turns off and stays off.

yThe warning light turns on when the

vehicle is being driven; it then turns off

and stays off.

VTraction Control system OFF indica-

tor light

This light comes on to indicate that the

Traction Control system is in non-opera-

tion mode. This does not constitute failure

of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

NOTE

yThe indicator light may stay on for a

while after the engine has been started,

especially in cold weather. This occurs

because the engine has not yet

warmed up and is completely normal.

The light will turn off when the engine

has reached a suitable operating tem-

perature.

yWhen an engine problem occurs and

the malfunction indicator lamp turns

on, the indicator light will also come

on.

The following two situations could indicate

malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system; if either should occur, have an

authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an

inspection of that system at the first avail-

able opportunity.

yThe indicator light does not turn on

when the ignition key is turned to the ON

position.

Starting and operating 7-23

yThe indicator light fails to turn off after

the engine is started, even when several

minutes have passed to allow the engine

to heat up sufficiently.

Traction Control system OFF

switch

Pressing the switch to deactivate the

Traction Control system can facilitate the

following operations:

ya standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or oth-

erwise slippery surface

yextrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the indicator light illuminates.

The Traction Control system will be deac-

tivated and the vehicle will behave like a

model not equipped with the Traction

Control system. When the switch is

pressed again to reactivate the Traction

Control system, the indicator light goes

off.

With the Traction Control system deacti-

vated, traction enhancement offered by

Traction Control system is unavailable.

Therefore you should not deactivate the

Traction Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

yWhen the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Traction Control sys-

tem, the Traction Control system auto-

matically reactivates itself the next

time the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position and the engine is restart-

ed.

yIf the switch is held down for 10 sec-

onds or longer, the indicator light goes

off, the Traction Control system is acti-

vated, and the system ignores any fur-

ther pressing of the switch. To make

the switch usable again, turn the igni-

tion key to the OFF position and restart

the engine.

yWhen the switch is pressed to deac-

tivate the Traction Control system, the

vehicle’s running performance is com-

parable with that of a vehicle that does

not have a Traction Control system. Do

not deactivate the Traction Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

700114

7-24 Starting and operating

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,

this system may not react immediately to

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for exam-

ple, a blow-out caused by running over a

sharp object).

700318

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle dam-

age and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the tire plac-

ard on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures increase

accordingly. Be sure to let the tires

cool thoroughly before adjusting

their pressures to the standard val-

ues shown on the tire placard. (Re-

fer to the “Tires and wheels” section

in chapter 11.) The tire pressure

monitoring system does not func-

tion when the vehicle is stationary.

After adjusting the tire pressures,

increase the vehicle speed to at

least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should go off a few

minutes later.

Starting and operating 7-25

– CONTINUED –

NOTE

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In-

dustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Parking your vehicle

If this light still comes on while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may have significant damage

and a fast leak that causes the tire to

lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. When a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel rim is replaced

without the original pressure sen-

sor/transmitter being transferred,

the low tire pressure warning light

will flash. This indicates the TPMS is

unable to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU deal-

er as soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or system

resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aero-

sol tire sealant into the tires, as this

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors. If the light flash-

es, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspect-

ed.

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts under the driver’s seat. This

may cause poor reception of the sig-

nals from the tire pressure sensors,

and the tire pressure monitoring

system will not function properly.

yNever leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or

sunny days, the temperature in a

closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause se-

vere or possibly fatal injuries to

them.

yDo not park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

yBe sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passenger

compartment, occupants in the

vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

7-26 Starting and operating

To set the parking brake, hold down the

brake pedal while pushing the parking

brake pedal as far as it will go.

To release the parking brake, hold down

the brake pedal while pushing the parking

brake pedal and slowly releasing it.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake warn-

ing light comes on. After starting the vehi-

cle, be sure that the warning light has

gone out before the vehicle is driven. Re-

fer to the “Warning and indicator lights”

section (chapter 3).

When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the selector

lever in the “P” (Park) position. Always set

the parking brake firmly when parking

your vehicle. Never rely on the transmis-

sion alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is head-

ed up the hill, the front wheels should be

turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

yNever drive while the parking

brake is set because this will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake linings. Before starting to

drive, always make sure that the

parking brake has been fully re-

leased.

yNever drive with your foot on the

parking brake pedal.

700327

700319 700320

700321

Starting and operating 7-27

– CONTINUED –

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the

main switch is turned “OFF” when the

cruise control is not in use to avoid unin-

tentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTE

If you move the cruise control lever or

press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “CRUISE” indicator light flash-

es. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

To set cruise control

1. Push the main switch button.

The “ ” indicator light on the com-

bination meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and release it.

Then release the accelerator pedal.

At this time, the “ ” indicator light is il-

luminated in the combination meter.

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions. This

may cause loss of vehicle control:

ydriving up or down a steep grade

ydriving on slippery or winding

roads

ydriving in heavy traffic

300332

700322

300333

700323

7-28 Starting and operating

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise con-

trol activated. Simply depress the acceler-

ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When

the accelerator pedal is released, the ve-

hicle will return to and maintain the previ-

ous cruising speed.

To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

There are three ways to cancel the cruise

control temporarily:

yPull the control lever in the “CANCEL”

direction.

yDepress the brake pedal.

yShift the selector lever into the “N” posi-

tion.

The “ ” indicator light in the combina-

tion meter goes off when the cruise control

is cancelled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or more, push the control lever up-

ward in the “RES/ACC” direction to return

to the original cruising speed automatical-

ly.

The “ ” indicator light in the combina-

tion meter will automatically come on at

this time.

To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

yPush the main switch again.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position (but only when the vehi-

cle is completely stopped).

To change the cruising speed

TTo increase the speed (by control le-

ver)

Push the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction and hold it until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then,

release the control lever. The vehicle

speed at that moment will be memorized

and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.25

second.

700161

300334

Starting and operating 7-29

– CONTINUED –

TTo increase the speed (by accelera-

tor pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accel-

erate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the difference between the actual ve-

hicle speed when the control lever is

pushed downward and the speed last

time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/

h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by

1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because

the cruise control system unit regards

this lever operation as that intended to

decrease the vehicle speed.

TTo decrease the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until

the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Then, release the control lever. The vehi-

cle speed at that moment will be memo-

rized and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by

pressing the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction quickly within

0.25 second.

TTo decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the de-

sired speed, press the control lever down-

ward in the “SET/COAST” direction once.

Now the desired speed is set and the ve-

hicle will keep running at that speed with-

out depressing the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control indicator light

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately three seconds.

The light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

300333

700322

7-30 Starting and operating

If you move the cruise control lever while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise

control function is deactivated and the

“CRUISE” indicator light flashes. To reac-

tivate the cruise control function, turn the

ignition switch back to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position, and then turn it again to

the “ON” position.

Cruise control set indicator

light

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately three seconds.

The light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

700323

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000

miles (1,600 km) .............................................. 8-2

Fuel economy hints ........................................... 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ......... 8-2

Catalytic converter ............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections .......................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries .............................. 8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ........................... 8-4

On-pavement and off road driving ................... 8-5

Winter driving ..................................................... 8-7

Operation during cold weather .............................. 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................ 8-9

Corrosion protection .............................................. 8-10

Snow tires ............................................................... 8-10

Tire chains ............................................................... 8-11

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ 8-11

Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-11

Vehicle capacity weight ......................................... 8-12

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................... 8-13

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ..................... 8-13

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-15

Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-15

When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-17

Trailer towing ...................................................... 8-17

Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-17

Maximum load limits .............................................. 8-18

Trailer hitches ......................................................... 8-21

Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-22

Trailer towing tips ................................................... 8-23

8-2 Driving tips

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your ve-

hicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

yDo not race the engine. And do not al-

low engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm ex-

cept in an emergency.

yDo not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

yAvoid starting suddenly and rapid accel-

eration, except in an emergency.

yAvoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to a newly installed or overhauled

engine or when brake pads or brake lin-

ings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to

save your fuel.

ySelect the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

yAvoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to main-

tain that speed for as long as possible.

yDo not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

yAvoid unnecessary engine idling.

yKeep the engine properly tuned.

yKeep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the driv-

er’s side. Low pressure will increase tire

wear and fuel consumption.

yUse the air conditioner only when nec-

essary.

yKeep the front and rear wheels in prop-

er alignment.

yAvoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon

monoxide)

yNever inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

yAlways properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

yNever run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

yAvoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a lengthy time while the en-

gine is running. If that is unavoid-

able, then use the ventilation fan

to force fresh air into the vehicle.

yAlways keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system always

works properly.

Driving tips 8-3

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gas-

es, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic convert-

er:

yUse only unleaded gasoline. Even a

small amount of leaded gasoline will dam-

age the catalytic converter.

yNever start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

yAvoid racing the engine.

yNever turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

yKeep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

yDo not apply undercoating or rust pre-

vention treatment to the heat shield of cat-

alytic converter and the exhaust system.

yIf at any time you suspect that ex-

haust fumes are entering the vehi-

cle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possi-

ble. If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all win-

dows fully open.

yKeep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

yAvoid fire hazards. Do not drive or

park the vehicle anywhere near

flammable materials (e.g. grass,

paper, rags or leaves), because

the catalytic converter operates at

very high temperatures.

yKeep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

800200

8-4 Driving tips

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recommend-

ed maintenance services listed in the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet” performed at

the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in an-

other country:

yConfirm the availability of the correct fu-

el. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements” sec-

tion in chapter 7.)

yComply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

yAlways maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

yAlways use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

800004

Driving tips 8-5

– CONTINUED –

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration, and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the fol-

lowing tips in mind:

yAn AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling, how-

ever, during extremely sharp turns or sud-

den braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an am-

ple distance from other vehicles.

yWhen replacing a tire, make sure you

use only the same size, circumference,

construction, brand, and load range as the

original tires listed on the tire placard. Us-

ing other sizes, circumferences or con-

struction may result in severe mechanical

damage to the drive train of your vehicle

and may affect ride, handling, braking,

speedometer/odometer calibration, and

clearance between the body and tires. It

also may be dangerous and lead to loss of

vehicle control.

yIf you use a temporary spare tire to re-

place a flat tire, be sure to use the original

temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle.

Using other sizes may result in severe

mechanical damage to the drive train of

your vehicle.

yAlways check the cold tire pressure be-

fore starting to drive. The recommended

tire pressure is provided on the tire plac-

ard, which is located under the door latch

on the driver’s side.

yTire chains should always be placed on

the front wheels only.

yThere are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detail information, see “Towing” sec-

tion in chapter 9.

On-pavement and off road

driving

yIn a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a

seat belt. You the driver and all

your passengers should fasten

the seatbelts before starting to

drive in order to minimize the

chance of serious injury or death.

yDo not make sharp turns and

quick maneuvers unless abso-

lutely unavoidable. Such actions

are dangerous as you may lose

control, possibly resulting in a

rollover which could cause death

or serious injury.

yAlways maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

8-6 Driving tips

Your B9 TRIBECA is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to

be used for wide applications including

off-road driving, but a higher center of

gravity in relation to the tread width as

compared with ordinary passenger cars

makes vehicles of this type more likely to

roll over. In reality, utility vehicles have a

significantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. The high ground clear-

ance of this vehicle is a real advantage,

giving you a better view of the road and al-

lowing you to anticipate problems earlier.

However, remember that your utility vehi-

cle is not designed for high-speed corner-

ing comparable to ordinary passenger

cars and that your vehicle could roll over if

you make a sharp turn at high speed. If

you do take your SUBARU off-road, cer-

tain common sense precautions such as

the following should be taken:

yMake certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

yCarry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

yDrive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

ySlow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the

like.

yDo not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

yAvoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

yDo not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers and thumbs on the out-

side of the rim.

yIf driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your ve-

hicle and may cause it to stall. Never at-

tempt to drive through rushing water; re-

gardless of its depth, it can wash away the

ground from under your tires, resulting in

possible loss of traction and even vehicle

rollover.

yAlways check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

yDo not drive or park over or near flam-

mable materials such as dry grass or fall-

en leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the en-

gine is running and right after engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

yAfter driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

yWhenever strong crosswinds are

present, slow down sufficiently to

maintain control of your vehicle.

Remember that your vehicle, with

its higher profile and center of

gravity, is more likely to be affect-

ed by crosswinds than ordinary

passenger cars.

yAlways use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

Driving tips 8-7

– CONTINUED –

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

ySecure all cargo carried inside the vehi-

cle and make certain that it is not piled

higher than the seatbacks. During sudden

stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be

thrown around in the vehicle and cause in-

jury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.

Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of

gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

yIf you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelera-

tor pedal slightly and move the selector le-

ver back and forth between “D” and “R” re-

peatedly. Do not race the engine. For the

best possible traction, avoid spinning the

wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

yWhen the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st.

yNever equip your vehicle with tires larg-

er than those specified in this manual.

yWash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

yFrequent driving of an AWD vehicle un-

der hard-driving conditions such as rough

roads or off roads will necessitate more

frequent replacement of engine oil, brake

fluid and transmission oil than that speci-

fied in the maintenance schedule de-

scribed in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

not using common sense precautions

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

Winter driving

Operation during cold weath-

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of

sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper

cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to pro-

vide enough power for cold winter starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and vis-

cosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil

will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

800201

8-8 Driving tips

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes be-

cause they may damage the paint of the

vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-

ature varies according to how much it is di-

luted, as indicated in the following table.

In order to prevent freezing of washer flu-

id, check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid con-

centration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside tem-

perature, it may freeze and block the noz-

zles.

TBefore driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and dan-

gerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driv-

ing, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid mak-

ing steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders period-

ically.

TParking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake when park-

ing for long periods in cold weather since

it could freeze in that position. Instead, ob-

serve the following.

1. Place the selector lever in “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked af-

ter use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or ice

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30% 10.4°F (–12°C)

50% –4°F (–20°C)

100% –49°F (–45°C)

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

TRefueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weath-

er.

Use only additives that are specifically de-

signed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

Driving on snowy and icy

roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the en-

gine brake effectively to control the vehi-

cle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when

necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behav-

ior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhanc-

es your vehicle’s braking performance on

snowy and icy roads. Refer to the “ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System)” and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control system” section in

chapter 7 for information on braking on

slippery surfaces.

TWiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow

control button in the “ ” position and

the temperature control dial set for maxi-

mum warmth until the wiper blades are

completely thawed out. If your vehicle is

equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful

to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To

thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear

window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow

starts to stick on the surface of the wind-

shield despite wiper operation, use the de-

froster with the airflow control button in

“ ” and the temperature control dial

set for maximum warmth. After the wind-

shield gets warmed enough to melt the

frozen snow on it, wash it away using the

windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the air flow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

8-10 Driving tips

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and sub-

zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section

(chapter 10).

Snow tires Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” which are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving. In winter, it may be possible to en-

hance performance through use of tires

designed specifically for winter driving

conditions.

If you choose to install winter tires on your

vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size

and type. You must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, construction,

brand and load range and you should nev-

er mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since

this may result in dangerous handling

characteristics. When you choose a tire,

make sure that there is enough clearance

between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your ve-

hicle.

Your vehicle comes with P255/55R18

“all season tires” as original equip-

ment. You should be aware that some

winter tires with that same size desig-

nation may actually be too large for the

vehicle and may cause rubbing on

sharp turns. Listed in the following is

the winter tire size that we recommend.

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

yWhen replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure you

use only the same size and con-

struction as recommended. Using

other sizes or construction may

affect speedometer/odometer cal-

ibration and clearance between

the body and tires. It also may be

dangerous and lead to loss of ve-

hicle control.

yYou must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, circum-

ferences, construction, brand,

and load range. Mixing other siz-

es, circumferences or construc-

tions may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive train

of your vehicle and may affect

ride, handling, braking and speed-

ometer/odometer calibration. It

also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control.

yDo not use a combination of radi-

al, belted bias or bias tires since it

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics and lead to an ac-

cident.

Driving tips 8-11

– CONTINUED –

Recommended winter (snow) tire size

P255/55R18 stud less

Tire chains

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may

require the use of tire chains, in which

case put genuine SUBARU spring chains

on the front wheels only. Genuine

SUBARU spring chains are available from

your SUBARU dealer. These chains can

be installed on “all season tires” as origi-

nal equipment. Never install them on win-

ter (snow) tires.

When driving with tire chains, drive at

speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When a

temporary spare tire is on a front wheel,

replace the temporary spare tire with the

rear tire on the same side of the vehicle,

and then fit chains on the front tires.

Always use the utmost care when driving

with tire chains – overconfidence because

you are driving with tire chains could eas-

ily lead to a serious accident.

Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the acceler-

ator pedal slightly and move the selector

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slip-

pery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st.

Refer to the “Automatic transmission” sec-

tion in chapter 7 for information on holding

the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

Tire chains cannot be used on tires

listed in the following because of

lack of clearance between the tires

and vehicle body.

All model: P255/55R 18 winter

(snow) tires

Never allow passengers to ride on a

folded rear seatback or in the cargo

area. Doing so may result in serious

injury.

yNever stack luggage or other car-

go higher than the top of the seat-

back because it could tumble for-

ward and injure passengers in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent. Keep luggage or cargo low,

as close to the floor as possible.

100094

8-12 Driving tips

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicle is deter-

mined by weight, not by available cargo

space. The maximum load you can carry

in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side door

pillar. It includes the total weight of the

driver and all passengers and their be-

longings, any optional equipment such as

a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

yWhen you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

yDo not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

ySecure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

yNever exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle han-

dles. This could result in loss of

control and cause personal injury.

Also, overloading can shorten the

life of your vehicle.

yDo not place anything on the ex-

tended luggage cover. Such items

could tumble forward in the event

of a sudden stop or a collision.

This could cause serious injury.

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

800202

B00326

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the driv-

er’s side door shows GVWR (Gross Vehi-

cle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross

Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle, fu-

el, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight, ei-

ther front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi-

cle scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because

they may lower the GVWR and GAWR

limitations. Replacement tires with a high-

er load range than the originals do not in-

crease the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Roof rail and crossbar (if

equipped)

800203

yFor cargo carrying purposes, the

roof molding must be used to-

gether with a roof crossbar kit and

the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. Otherwise, damage to the

roof or paint or a dangerous road

hazard due to loss of cargo could

result.

800252

8-14 Driving tips

Cargo can be carried after securing the

roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and install-

ing the appropriate carrying attachment.

When installing the roof crossbar kit, fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attach-

ment, never exceed the maximum load

limit explained in the following. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading

your vehicle” section in this chapter for in-

formation on loading cargo into or onto

your vehicle. The maximum load limit of

the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach-

ment must not exceed 150 lbs (67.5 kg).

Place the heaviest load at the bottom,

nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the

cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

TInstalling carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of the crossbars is de-

signed to carry loads (cargo and attach-

ment) of not more than 150 lbs (67.5 kg).

Before operating the vehicle, make sure

that the cargo is properly secured on the

attachment.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

TRemoval and installation of the

crossbars

Each of the two roof molding has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use a

screwdriver to remove the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

yWhen using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Overload-

ing may cause damage to the ve-

hicle and create a safety hazard.

800205

Driving tips 8-15

– CONTINUED –

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

1) Trailer hitch

The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class

1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer

weight and maximum gross tongue weight

are indicated in the following table.

When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-

tions in the next section “Trailer towing”.

Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

yNever exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal inju-

ries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. Refer to the next section

“Trailer towing” for possible rec-

ommendations and limitations.

800256

yTrailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has

safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum

gross weight. Towing trailers

without safety chains could create

a traffic safety hazard if the trailer

separates from the hitch due to

coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

yBe sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could get

loose and create a traffic safety

hazard.

yUse only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

Maximum

gross trailer

weight

Maximum

gross tongue

weight

vehicle with-

out cooling kit

2,000 lbs

(906 kg)

200 lbs

(90 kg)

vehicle with

cooling kit

3,500 lbs

(1,587 kg)

350 lbs

(158 kg)

800257

8-16 Driving tips

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes

through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin

securely.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does

not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-

count; however, be careful not to let them

drag on the ground.

800207

800258

Do not connect safety chains to part

of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

800209

Driving tips 8-17

– CONTINUED –

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing trail-

er’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,

stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

When you do not tow a trailer

yRemove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

yPlace the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to pro-

tect against possible damage.

yOccasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using the terminal

grease.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safe-

ty and satisfaction depend upon proper

use of correct equipment and cautious op-

eration of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur-

chasing a hitch and other necessary tow-

ing equipment appropriate for your vehi-

cle. In addition, be sure to follow the in-

structions on correct installation and use

provided by the trailer and other towing

equipment manufacturers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for in-

juries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any er-

rors or omissions in the instructions ac-

companying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehi-

cle damage or malfunction caused by trail-

er towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a

trailer, more frequent maintenance will be

800210

8-18 Driving tips

required due to the additional load. (Refer

to “Maintenance schedule under severe

driving conditions” in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

Maximum load limits

TTotal trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight shown in the following

table.

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following. Ex-

ceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

yAdequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

yBefore towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

800211

Driving tips 8-19

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle without cooling kit

Vehicle with cooling kit

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade con-

tinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside

temperature of 104°F (40°C) or above.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade con-

tinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an outside

temperature of 104°F (40°C) or above.

1,750 lbs (794 kg)

TGross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

GVWR is shown on the certification label

located on the driver’s door of your vehi-

800212

8-20 Driving tips

cle.

Certification label

TGross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and

rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification label.

Certification label

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing sta-

tion.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

TTongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the appropriate one

of the following maximum values:

800203

800213

800203

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

800214

Driving tips 8-21

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle without cooling kit: 200 lbs (90 kg)

Vehicle with cooling kit: 350 lbs (158 kg)

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the following

illustration. When weighing the tongue

load, be sure to position the towing cou-

pler at the height at which it would be dur-

ing actual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by prop-

er distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as even-

ly as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

Trailer hitches

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer.

800215

60% 40% 50% 50%

800216

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your ve-

hicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

yDo not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, or other

systems when installing a hitch or

other trailer towing equipment.

yDo not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

8-22 Driving tips

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer

hitch is recommended. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-

able, be sure the hitch is suited to your ve-

hicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-

sional hitch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your ve-

hicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch man-

ufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check

that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are

tight.

Connecting a trailer

TTrailer brakes

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system. Elec-

tric brakes or surge brakes are recom-

mended, and must be installed properly.

Check that your trailer’s brakes conform

with Federal, state/province and/or other

applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s

brake system is not designed to be tapped

into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system.

Please ask your SUBARU dealer and pro-

fessional trailer supplier for more informa-

tion about the trailer’s brake system.

TTrailer safety chains

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become disconnect-

ed, the trailer could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing ve-

hicle and trailer with trailer safety chains.

Pass the chains crossing each other un-

der the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer

from dropping onto the ground in case the

trailer tongue should disconnect from the

hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-

count; however, be careful not to let them

drag on the ground.

For more information about the safety

chain connection, refer to the instructions

for your hitch and trailer.

yAdequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

yDo not directly connect your trail-

er’s hydraulic brake system to the

hydraulic brake system in your

vehicle. Direct connection would

cause the vehicle’s brake perfor-

mance to deteriorate and could

lead to an accident.

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

Driving tips 8-23

– CONTINUED –

TSide mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors pro-

vide a good rearward field of view without

significant blind spots. If significant blind

spots occur with the vehicle’s standard

side mirrors, use towing mirrors that con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations.

TTrailer lights

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to in-

crease its capacity and accommodate wir-

ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you

hitch up.

TTires

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressure un-

der trailer towing conditions is shown in

chapter 12, “Specifications” and in “GAS

STATION REFERENCE” at the end of this

manual. Adjust the rear tire pressure to

the recommended pressure when the tires

are cold. Normal pressure should be

maintained in the front tires.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in ac-

cordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare

tire is firmly secured.

Trailer towing tips

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

800018

Never tow a trailer when the tempo-

rary spare tire is used. The tempo-

rary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

yNever exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly coun-

try on hot days.

yWhen towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ

extra caution when towing a trail-

er and you should never speed.

You should also keep the follow-

ing tips in mind:

8-24 Driving tips

TBefore starting out on a trip

yCheck that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

yCheck that the vehicle sits horizontally

with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is

tipped sharply up at the front and down at

the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

yCheck that the tire pressures are cor-

rect.

yCheck that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected prop-

erly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is connect-

ed properly and trailer’s brake lights illu-

minate when the vehicle’s brake pedal

is pressed, and that the trailer’s turn sig-

nal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn

signal lever is operated.

– the safety chains are connected prop-

erly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured safe-

ty in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good rear-

ward field of view without a significant

blind spot.

ySufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

TDriving with a trailer

yYou should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may re-

sult in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

yAvoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

ySlow down before turning. Make a long-

er than normal turning radius because the

trailer wheels will be closer than the vehi-

cle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a

tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

yCrosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and slow down im-

mediately but gradually.

yWhen passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by at-

taching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

yBacking up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

yIf the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed im-

mediately by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

TDriving on grades

yBefore going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

800217

Driving tips 8-25

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

yWhen driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

yWhen driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the water temperature gauge

pointer and AT OIL TEMP warning light

since the engine and transmission are rel-

atively prone to overheating under these

conditions. If the water temperature gauge

pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone

or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates, immediately switch off the air con-

ditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest

safe place. Refer to the “Engine overheat-

ing” section in chapter 9, and “Warning

and indicator lights” section in chapter 3.

NOTE

The temperature of engine coolant is

less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT

zone in the “D” position than in the

manual mode position.

yAvoid using the accelerator pedal to

stay stationary on an uphill slope instead

of using the parking brake or foot brake.

That may cause the transmission fluid to

overheat.

TParking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehi-

cle and trailer when parking. Apply the

parking brake firmly. You should not park

on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, re-

lease the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then ap-

ply the parking brake; slowly release the

regular brakes.

5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.

In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an emergency ........ 9-2

Spare tire ............................................................. 9-2

Removing the spare tire ......................................... 9-3

Re-storage of spare tire ......................................... 9-5

Temporary spare tire .......................................... 9-6

Flat tires .............................................................. 9-7

Changing a flat tire ................................................. 9-7

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 9-10

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-11

How to jump start ................................................... 9-12

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-14

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ......................................................... 9-14

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ......................................................... 9-14

Towing ................................................................. 9-15

Towing and tie-down hooks .................................. 9-15

Using a flat-bed truck ............................................. 9-17

Towing with all wheels on the ground .................. 9-18

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked .......................................................... 9-18

Maintenance tools .............................................. 9-19

Jack and jack handle .............................................. 9-19

9-2 In case of emergency

In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in an

emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch po-

sition.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work. Spare tire

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire

holder located under the cargo area.

The spare tire holder has a hoist mecha-

nism that can lower and raise the spare

tire easily.

The spare tire holder is designed to carry

only the following kinds of tires:

ythe temporary spare tire that came with

your vehicle

ya full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the

spare tire holder in an emergency only. Af-

ter having the full-size flat tire repaired,

immediately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire, see

300504

900201

In case of emergency 9-3

– CONTINUED –

the “Temporary spare tire” section in this

chapter for instructions and precautions.

Removing the spare tire

1. Take the wheel nut wrench and exten-

sion out of the tool bag. Refer to the “Main-

tenance tools” section in this chapter.

2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in the

cargo area.

3. Take out the jack.

4. Remove the access cover.

5. Remove the cap.

6. Locate the hex-headed hoist shaft end

inside the hole.

7. Fit the extension onto the hex-headed

hoist shaft end.

8. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the ex-

tension.

9. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-

900202

900203

900204

900205

900206

9-4 In case of emergency

wise with the wheel nut wrench until the

temporary spare tire is on the ground with

enough cable slack to allow you to pull it

out from under the vehicle.

10.Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable

and pull it through the center of the tempo-

rary spare tire.

11.After the temporary spare tire is re-

moved from the cable, the cable must be

wound up completely by turning the hoist

nut shaft clockwise until you hear a click-

ing sound. Also visually inspect the cable

to make certain that there is no longer any

slack present.

yBe sure to remove (not simply

keep it open) the subfloor storage

lid before turning the wheel nut

wrench, otherwise the lid may be

damaged.

yDo not put your fingers into the

center hole of the temporary

spare tire while you pulling it out,

because they might be pinched in

between the wheel and the retain-

er.

900207

900208

yDo not use the extension when

turning the wheel nuts. If you did,

you would not be able to achieve

sufficient tightening torque. The

wheel nuts could then come

loose, resulting in a serious acci-

dent.

yWhen using the spare tire hoist:

After the temporary spare tire is

removed from the cable, wind the

cable up completely until the re-

tainer at end of the cable sits

against the underside of the vehi-

cle. Driving with the cable not re-

tracted fully could result in dam-

age to the adjacent under floor

parts and lead to a serious acci-

dent.

yThe spare tire holder is designed

to carry only the following kinds

of tires:

ythe temporary spare tire that

came with your vehicle

ya full-size flat tire

In case of emergency 9-5

Re-storage of spare tire

1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end

counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently

enough to allow the cable end retainer go

through center hole of the temporary

spare tire.

2. Insert the retainer through the center

hole of the temporary tire (with the outside

of the tire facing up).

3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with

the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up

completely until you hear a few clicking

sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare

tire holding cable has been wound up

completely by shaking the temporary tire.

4. Put the rubber cap on the hoist shaft

end hole.

5. Fit the access cover.

6. Place the wheel nut wrench and exten-

sion back into the tool bag and store the

jack and tool bag in their storage loca-

tions.

7. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

A full size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder in

an emergency only. After having

the full-size flat tire repaired, im-

mediately swap it with the tempo-

rary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that is

not flat in the spare tire holder.

Doing so can result in damage to

adjacent under floor parts and can

lead to a serious accident.

When using the spare tire hoist:

Do not use air tools or power tools

to turn the spare tire hoist shaft end.

If you do, it could result in severe

mechanical damage to the spare tire

hoist.

If the temporary spare tire is not

stored securely, it could damage ad-

jacent areas of the vehicle and make

an abnormal noise.

yWhen stowing a flat tire in the

spare tire holder, turn the hoist

shaft end only slowly. If it is

turned quickly, the wheel disc of

the flat tire could be damaged.

yA full-size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder in

an emergency only. After having

the flat tire repaired, immediately

swap it with the temporary spare

tire.

yRemember that the tread width of

a flat tire is wider than that of the

temporary spare tire. When carry-

ing a flat tire stowed in the spare

tire holder, make sure the tire

does not touch any obstacles.

9-6 In case of emergency

Temporary spare tire

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is de-

signed for emergency use only. Remove

the temporary spare tire and re-install the

conventional tire as soon as possible be-

cause the spare tire is designed only for

temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tempo-

rary spare tire periodically to keep the tire

ready for use. The correct pressure is 60

psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2).

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

yDo not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

yDo not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire

size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

yDo not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

yDo not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

yWhen the wear indicator appears on the

tread, replace the tire.

yThe temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

yNever tow a trailer when the tem-

porary spare tire is used. The tem-

porary spare tire is not designed

to sustain the towing load. Use of

the temporary spare tire when

towing can result in failure of the

spare tire and/or less stability of

the vehicle and may lead to an ac-

cident.

yWhen a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

flash. This indicates the tire pres-

sure monitoring system (TPMS) is

unable to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for tire

and sensor replacement and/or

system resetting.

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechani-

cal damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

900209

In case of emergency 9-7

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

Changing a flat tire 1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenev-

er possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

7 seater models

1) Jack handle

2) Jack

3) Spare tire

yDo not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the jack-

ing point or sink into the ground

and this can result in a severe ac-

cident.

yUse only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get un-

der the vehicle while supporting

the vehicle with this jack.

yAlways turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in a severe acci-

dent.

600122

900261

9-8 In case of emergency

5 seater models

1) Jack handle

2) Jack

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the jack and jack handle.

The jack and jack handle are stored under

the floor of the cargo area.

6. Remove the spare tire.

Refer to the sections “Spare tire” in this

chapter for its location, instructions and

precautions.

Carefully read the section “Temporary

spare tire” in this chapter and strictly fol-

low the instructions.

NOTE

Make sure the jack is well lubricated

before using it.

7. Insert the tip (wrapped in vinyl tape or

a cloth) of a flat-head screwdriver into the

slot between the wheel and cap. Use it to

remove the cap.

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

900262 900211

900212

900213

900214

In case of emergency 9-9

– CONTINUED –

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10.Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

11.Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

12.Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and

hub with a cloth.

13.Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

14.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

15.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in

the illustration.

The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to

89 lbf·ft (100 to 120 N·m, 10 to 12 kgf·m).

This torque is equivalent to applying ap-

proximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at

the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never

900215

900009

600162

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

600192

9-10 In case of emergency

use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or

a pipe extension on the wrench because

you may exceed the specified torque.

Have the wheel nut torque checked at the

nearest automotive service facility.

16.Store the flat tire in the spare tire hold-

er.

Refer to the sections “Spare tire” in this

chapter for its location, instructions and

precautions.

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a sen-

sor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

Do not use the extension when turn-

ing the wheel nuts. If you did, you

would not be able to achieve suffi-

cient tightening torque. The wheel

nuts could then come loose, result-

ing in a serious accident.

900208

yWhen stowing a flat tire in the

spare tire holder, turn the hoist

shaft end only slowly. If it is

turned quickly, the wheel disc of

the flat tire could be damaged.

yA full-size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder in

an emergency only. After having

the flat tire repaired, immediately

swap it with the temporary spare

tire.

yRemember that the tread width of

a flat tire is wider than that of the

temporary spare tire. When carry-

ing a flat tire stowed in the spare

tire holder, make sure the tire

does not touch any obstacles.

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

700318

In case of emergency 9-11

– CONTINUED –

Jump starting

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, never brake

suddenly and keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing

speed. Then slowly pull off the road

to a safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle dam-

age and serious personal injury

could occur.

Check the pressure for all four tires

and adjust the pressure to the COLD

tire pressure shown on the vehicle

placard on the door pillar on the

driver’s side. If this light still comes

on while driving after adjusting the

tire pressure, a tire may have signif-

icant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aero-

sol tire sealant into the tires, as this

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors.

If the light flashes, promptly contact

a SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

yBattery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the ve-

hicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get medi-

cal help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water, and

obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

yThe gas generated by a battery ex-

plodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

yNever attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst or

explode.

9-12 In case of emergency

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is ground-

ed.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehi-

cle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

yWhenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal ob-

jects such as rings, bands or oth-

er metal jewelry.

yBe sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have loose

or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables in

suitable condition are available.

yA running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away from

the cooling fan, belts and any oth-

er moving engine parts. Remov-

ing rings, watches and ties is ad-

visable.

yJump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are unsure

about the proper procedure for

jump starting, consult a compe-

tent mechanic.

In case of emergency 9-13

– CONTINUED –

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

900216

1)Connect one jumper cable to the pos-

itive (+) terminal on the discharged bat-

tery.

2)Connect the other end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the

booster battery.

3)Connect one end of the other cable to

the negative (–) terminal of the booster

battery.

4)Connect the other end of the cable to

the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

9-14 In case of emergency

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehi-

cle that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect the

cables in exactly the reverse order.

Engine overheating

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “MIN”

mark, add coolant up to the “MAX” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

In case of emergency 9-15

– CONTINUED –

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following pro-

cedures for safety.

Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

Front towing hook:

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the tool bag.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyl

tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between

the cover and the front bumper, and use it

to pry the cover open.

NOTE

The cover is attached to the front

bumper with five lugs.

Never tow AWD vehicles with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

900217

yUse only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or tie-

down purposes.

yNever use the tie-down hook clos-

est to the muffler under the vehi-

cle for towing purposes.

yTo prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load to

the towing hooks.

900218

9-16 In case of emergency

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until the threads can no longer be

seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

Rear towing hook:

1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver

and wheel nut wrench from the on board

tool bag.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper

using a screwdriver, and you will find a

threaded hole for attaching the towing

hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

900219

900220

yDo not use the towing hook ex-

cept when towing your vehicle.

yBe sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the vehi-

cle could interfere with proper op-

eration of the SRS airbag system

in a frontal collision.

900221

900222

900223

In case of emergency 9-17

– CONTINUED –

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.

Put the thread hole cover on the rear

bumper.

Front tie-down hooks:

The front tie-down hooks are located be-

tween each of the front tires and the front

bumper.

Rear tie-down hooks:

The rear tie-down hooks are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your vehi-

cle. Use the following procedures to en-

sure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” po-

sition.

2. Press the parking brake pedal firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

yDo not use the towing hook ex-

cept when towing your vehicle.

yBe sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the vehi-

cle could interfere with proper op-

eration of the SRS airbag system

in a frontal collision.

900224

Use the rear tie-down hooks only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip off

the hooks, possibly causing a dan-

gerous situation.

900225

900226

9-18 In case of emergency

Towing with all wheels on the

ground

1. Check the transmission and differential

oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper

level if necessary.

2. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the

“ACC” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door

locking switches or the remote keyless en-

try system, you can unlock it from inside

the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the bot-

tom-center of the rear gate trim using flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

yNever turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the ve-

hicle is being towed because the

steering wheel and the direction

of the wheels will be locked.

yRemember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater ef-

fort to operate the brake pedal and

steering wheel.

900227

yIf transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

yDo not run the engine while being

towed using this method. Trans-

mission damage could result if

the vehicle is towed with the en-

gine running.

yThe traveling speed must be limit-

ed to less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

and the traveling distance to less

than 31 miles (50 km). For greater

speeds and distances, transport

your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

900228

In case of emergency 9-19

– CONTINUED –

3. Unlock the rear gate by moving the le-

ver to the right.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools:

Screwdriver

Towing hook (eye bolt)

Wheel nut wrench

Extension

Jack and jack handle

7 seater models

5 seater models

The jack and jack handle is stored under

900263

900230

900264

900240

9-20 In case of emergency

the cargo area.

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat

tires” section in this chapter.

Appearance care

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ............................................. 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels .................................... 10-3

Corrosion protection .......................................... 10-3

Most common causes of corrosion ...................... 10-3

To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior .......................................... 10-4

Seat fabric ............................................................... 10-4

Leather seat materials ............................................ 10-4

Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surfaces ....................... 10-5

10-2 Appearance care

Appearance care

Exterior care

Washing

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure be-

forehand that the car wash is of suit-

able type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the ve-

hicle at least once a month to avoid con-

tamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree

sap, and bird droppings should be washed

off by using a light detergent, as required.

If you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

TWashing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deic-

ing road surfaces are extremely corrosive,

accelerating the corrosion of underbody

components, such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the un-

derbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses,

sensor harnesses, and other parts

when washing suspension compo-

nents.

TUsing a warm water washer

yKeep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

yDo not wash the same area continuous-

ly.

yIf a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

yWhen washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes.

yDo not wash the engine compart-

ment and areas adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake,

electrical parts or the power steer-

ing fluid reservoir, it will cause en-

gine trouble or faulty power steer-

ing respectively.

ySince your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become tan-

gled around it, damaging the wip-

er arm and other components.

Ask the automatic car-wash oper-

ator not to let the brushes touch

the wiper arm or to fix the wiper

arm on the rear window glass with

adhesive tape before operating

the machine.

Appearance care 10-3

– CONTINUED –

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and ap-

ply them according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax or polish when the paint-

ed surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the sur-

face no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always pol-

ish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain

compound is recommended. Never use a

coarse-grained compound. Coarser

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

NOTE

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

Cleaning aluminum wheels

yPromptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

yDo not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral clean-

ing agent, and later rinse thoroughly with

water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff

brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

yClean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num wheels) with water as soon as possi-

ble when it has been splashed with sea

water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven

on roads treated with salt or other agents.

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

Most common causes of cor-

rosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial pol-

lution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehi-

cle remains for a long time, even though

10-4 Appearance care

other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent cor-

rosion of the body and suspension com-

ponents. Also, wash the vehicle promptly

after driving on any of the following surfac-

es:

yroads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

ymud, sand, or gravel

ycoastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated ga-

rage. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the ve-

hicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use or-

ganic solvents.)

Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor-

oughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using

a solution of mild soap and lukewarm wa-

ter then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a com-

mercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the

cleaner on a hidden place and make sure

it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use

the cleaner according to its instructions.

NOTE

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials.

Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

Appearance care 10-5

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove dif-

ficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of gen-

uine leather.

Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when nec-

essary.

NOTE

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, con-

sole panel, switches, combi-

nation meter, and other plas-

tic surfaces

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

NOTE

Do not use organic solvents such as

paint thinners or gasoline, or strong

cleaning agents that contain those sol-

vents.

Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions .................................. 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ........................................................ 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the

engine compartment while the engine is

running .................................................................. 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4

Engine compartment overview ......................... 11-6

Engine oil ............................................................ 11-7

Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-7

Changing the oil and oil filter ................................ 11-7

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-9

Recommended grade and viscosity under

severe driving conditions .................................... 11-10

Cooling system .................................................. 11-10

Hose and connections ........................................... 11-11

Engine coolant ........................................................ 11-11

Air cleaner element ............................................ 11-13

Replacing the air cleaner element ......................... 11-13

Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-14

Recommended spark plugs ................................... 11-14

Drive belts ........................................................... 11-15

Automatic transmission fluid ............................ 11-15

Checking the fluid level ......................................... 11-15

Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-16

Front differential gear oil ................................... 11-16

Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-16

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-17

Rear differential gear oil .................................... 11-17

Checking the gear oil level .................................... 11-17

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-18

Power steering fluid ........................................... 11-19

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-19

Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-19

Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-20

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-20

Recommended brake fluid ..................................... 11-20

Brake booster ..................................................... 11-21

Brake pedal ......................................................... 11-21

Checking the brake pedal free play ...................... 11-21

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-21

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............... 11-22

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings .......... 11-22

Parking brake stroke .......................................... 11-23

Tires and wheels ................................................ 11-23

Types of tires .......................................................... 11-23

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 11-23

Tire inspection ........................................................ 11-25

Tire pressures and wear ........................................ 11-25

Wheel balance ......................................................... 11-27

Wear indicators ....................................................... 11-27

Tire rotation ............................................................. 11-28

Tire replacement ..................................................... 11-28

Wheel replacement ................................................. 11-29

Aluminum wheels ............................................... 11-29

Maintenance and service

Windshield washer fluid .................................... 11-30

Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-31

Windshield wiper blade assembly ........................ 11-31

Windshield wiper blade rubber ............................. 11-32

Rear window wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-33

Rear window wiper blade rubber .......................... 11-33

Battery ................................................................. 11-35

Fuses ................................................................... 11-36

Main fuse ............................................................. 11-37

Installation of accessories ................................ 11-38

Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-39

Headlight ................................................................. 11-40

Parking light ............................................................ 11-41

Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-42

Front fog light ......................................................... 11-42

Rear combination lights ......................................... 11-42

Backup light/Tail light ............................................ 11-43

Rear gate light ......................................................... 11-43

License plate light .................................................. 11-44

Dome light ............................................................... 11-44

Map light .................................................................. 11-45

Door step light ........................................................ 11-45

Cargo area light ...................................................... 11-46

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance a nd service

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize your-

self with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and ser-

vice for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

yTesting of an All-Wheel Drive ve-

hicle must NEVER be performed

on a single two-wheel dynamome-

ter or similar apparatus. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in transmis-

sion damage and in uncontrolled

vehicle movement and may cause

an accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

yAlways select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

yAlways be very careful to avoid in-

jury when working on the vehicle.

Remember that some of the mate-

rials in the vehicle may be hazard-

ous if improperly used or handled,

for example, battery acid.

yYour vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

yAlways use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

yNever get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

a safety stands to support the ve-

hicle.

yNever keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as a

garage or other closed areas.

yDo not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

yBecause the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only by

your SUBARU dealer.

11-4 Maintenance and service

Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

When you do checking or ser-

vicing in the engine compart-

ment while the engine is run-

ning

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

yWear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly wash

them out with clean water.

yDo not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seatbelt

pretensioner system, or attempt

to take its connectors apart, as

that may activate the system or it

can render it inoperative. The wir-

ing and connectors of these sys-

tems are yellow for easy identifi-

cation. NEVER use a circuit tester

for these wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pre-

tensioner needs service, consult

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

yAlways stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

yAlways let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine is stopped.

yDo not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

yAlways remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position, the

cooling fan may operate suddenly

even when the engine is stopped.

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving en-

gine parts. Removing rings, watch-

es and ties is advisable.

B00300

Maintenance and service 11-5

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving

the lever toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lower the hood to a point approximate-

ly 20 in (50 cm) from the closed position

and then give the hood a strong push

down to make it drop.

2. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not

push the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

B00301

Always check that the hood is prop-

erly locked before you start driving.

If it is not, it might fly open while the

vehicle is moving and block your

view, which may cause an accident

and serious bodily injury.

When closing the hood, be careful

not to pinch your or other person’s

hands or anything else in the hood.

11-6 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

123 45

1112 10 9 8

B00302

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-13)

2) Power steering fluid reservoir (page

11-19)

3) Differential gear oil level gauge (page

11-16)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level

gauge (page 11-15)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-20)

6) Fuse box (page 11-36)

7) Battery (page 11-35)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-30)

9) Radiator cap (page 11-11)

10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-7)

11) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-

11)

12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-7)

Maintenance and service 11-7

– CONTINUED –

Engine oil

Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly insert-

ed until it stops with the graphic symbol

“ ” on its top appearing as shown in

the illustration.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the up-

per level.

If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not

add any additional oil above the upper lev-

el when the engine is cold.

Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “Warran-

ty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in the

maintenance schedule when driving on

dusty roads, when short trips are frequent-

ly made, or when driving in extremely cold

whether.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the en-

gine idle for approximately 10 minutes to

ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

B00303

yUse only engine oil with the rec-

ommended grade and viscosity.

yBe careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If en-

gine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

B00304

11-8 Maintenance and service

4. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it se-

curely with a new sealing washer after the

oil has completely drained out.

6. Open the access cover by removing

the five clips and turning the access cover

counterclockwise. The oil filter will be ex-

posed.

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a

thin coat of engine oil to the seal.

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil fil-

ter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist

or damage the seal.

10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indi-

cated in the following table after the seal

makes contact with the bottom of engine.

11.Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.

12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil capacity (Guideline):

5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

B00305 B00306

B00307

Oil filter color Part number Amount of

rotation

Black 15208AA031 3/4 rotation

yNever over tighten the oil filter be-

cause that can result in an oil leak.

yThoroughly wipe off any engine

oil that has spilled over the ex-

haust pipe and/or under-cover. If

left unremoved, the oil could

catch fire.

Maintenance and service 11-9

– CONTINUED –

The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil

depends on the quantity of oil that has

been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the tempera-

ture of the oil and the time the oil is left

flowing out. After refilling the engine with

oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to

confirm that the level is correct.

13.Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

seal and drain plug.

14.Run the engine until it reaches the nor-

mal operating temperature. Then stop the

engine and wait a few minutes to allow the

oil drain back. Check the oil level again

and if necessary, add more engine oil.

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified

with the ILSAC certification mark

(Starburst mark)

or API classification SM with the

words “ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be

identified by looking for either or both of

the following marks displayed on the oil

container.

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst

Mark)

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving ca-

pabilities

In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that

will add to fuel economy. The following ta-

ble lists the recommended viscosities and

applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be

used together as long as they are the

same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

B00014

SAE

5W-30

B00446

11-10 Maintenance and service

SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature

*: 5W-30 is recommended.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide

better fuel economy. However, in hot

weather, oil of higher viscosity is required

to properly lubricate the engine.

Recommended grade and

viscosity under severe driv-

ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in ar-

eas with very high temperatures, or used

for heavy-duty applications such as tow-

ing a trailer, use of oil with the following

grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SM (or SL):

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Cooling system

5W-30*

10W-30, 10W-40

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020 80 10040

B00016

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

yThe cooling system has been

filled at the factory with a high

quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-

around coolant which provides

protection against freezing down

to –33°F (–36°C). For adding, use

genuine SUBARU coolant or an

equivalent: a mixture of 50% soft

water and 50% ethylene-glycol ba-

sis coolant. Use of improper cool-

ants may result in corrosion in the

cooling system. It is important to

maintain protection against freez-

ing and corrosion, even if freezing

temperatures are not expected.

Never mix different kinds of cool-

ant.

Maintenance and service 11-11

– CONTINUED –

Hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be de-

fective. Check the fuse and replace it if

necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have

the cooling system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Engine coolant

TChecking the coolant level

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

yDo not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

B00309

yBe careful not to spill engine cool-

ant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

yDo not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

B00018

11-12 Maintenance and service

TChanging the coolant

Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner whenever the coolant is

replaced.

Change the engine coolant and add gen-

uine Subaru cooling system conditioner

using the following procedures according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the

coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the

drain plug securely.

4. Install the under cover.

1) Fill up to here

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner in the radiator. Add genu-

ine Subaru cooling system conditioner un-

til the coolant level reaches the filler neck.

Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this

may lead to insufficient air bleeding and

trapped air in the system.

Coolant capacity (Guideline):

7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

B00310

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

B00311

yBe careful not to spill engine cool-

ant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

yDo not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

Maintenance and service 11-13

– CONTINUED –

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir

tank’s “FULL” level mark.

7. Put the radiator cap back on and tight-

en firmly. At this time, make sure that the

rubber gasket in the radiator cap is cor-

rectly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the cool-

ant cools down (122 to 140°F [50 to

60°C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add

coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to

the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap

back on and tighten firmly.

Air cleaner element

The air cleaner element functions as a fil-

ter screen. When the element is perforat-

ed or removed, engine wear will be exces-

sive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is

unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-

ment.

Replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

B00309

B00018

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the en-

gine backfires, you could be burned.

11-14 Maintenance and service

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

3. Install a new air cleaner element.

4. To install the air cleaner case cover,

snap the two clamps on the air cleaner

case cover.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Recommended spark plugs

ILFR6B (NGK)

B00312

B00313

Maintenance and service 11-15

– CONTINUED –

Drive belts

The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner compressor depend on

drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-

quires that belt tension be correct.

It is unnecessary to check belt tension pe-

riodically because your engine is

equipped with an automatic belt tension

adjuster. However, replacement of the

belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact

your SUBARU dealer.

Automatic transmission fluid

Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands

largely as its temperature rises; the fluid

level differs according to fluid tempera-

ture. Therefore, there are two different

scales for checking the level of hot fluid

and cold fluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked

without warming up the fluid on the

“COLD” range, we recommend checking

the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

TChecking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid

up to normal operating temperature; 158

to 176°F (70 to 80°C) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each po-

sition. Then shift it in the “P” position, and

run the engine at idling speed.

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range

2) COLD range

3) Upper level

4) Lower level

B00315

B00316

11-16 Maintenance and service

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid

level on the gauge. If it is below the lower

level on the “HOT” range, add the recom-

mended automatic transmission fluid up to

the upper level.

TChecking the fluid level when the

fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked

without time to warm up the automatic

transmission, check to see that the fluid

level is between the lower level and upper

level on the “COLD” range. If it is below

that range, add fluid up to the upper level.

Be careful not to overfill.

Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of automat-

ic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

Pennzoil ATF-J*

* Available only in the USA (except

Alaska and Hawaii)

NOTE

Using any non-specified type of auto-

matic transmission fluid could result in

damage inside the transmission. When

replacing the automatic transmission

fluid, be sure to use a fluid of the types

specified above.

Front differential gear oil

Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

Be careful not to spill automatic

transmission fluid when adding it. If

automatic transmission fluid touch-

es the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If au-

tomatic transmission fluid gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

B00317

Maintenance and service 11-17

– CONTINUED –

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the up-

per level.

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem-

perature

Rear differential gear oil

Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear

differential protector. The differential pro-

tector provides protection to the rear dif-

ferential assembly during off-road use.

Removal of the rear differential protector

is not required when checking the oil level.

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

Be careful not to spill front differen-

tial gear oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

B00318

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

B00032

2B00319

11-18 Maintenance and service

1) Filler hole

2) Drain hole

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and

check the oil level. The oil level should be

kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

If the oil level is below the bottom edge of

the hole, add oil through the filler hole to

raise the level.

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem-

perature

B00320

yBe careful not to spill rear differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If

rear differential gear oil touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

rear differential gear oil gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

yIf the vehicle requires frequent re-

filling, there may be an oil leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

B00032

Maintenance and service 11-19

Power steering fluid

Checking the fluid level

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level dif-

fers according to fluid temperature. There-

fore, the reservoir tank has two different

checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and

stop the engine.

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that the oil level is be-

tween “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the sur-

face of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the appli-

cable “MIN” line, add the recommended

fluid as necessary to bring the level be-

tween the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indi-

cate possible leakage. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for inspection.

Recommended fluid

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

Be careful not to burn yourself be-

cause the fluid may be hot.

yWhen power steering fluid is be-

ing added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any dirt

into the tank. And never use dif-

ferent brands together.

yAvoid spilling fluid when adding it

in the tank.

HOT MAX

COLD MAX

HOT MIN

COLD MIN

B00321

yBe careful not to spill power steer-

ing fluid when adding it. If power

steering fluid touches the exhaust

pipe, it may cause a bad smell,

smoke, and/or a fire. If power

steering fluid gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

11-20 Maintenance and service

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add

the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed con-

tainer.

Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu-

yNever let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately

flush them thoroughly with clean

water. For safety, when perform-

ing this work, wearing eye protec-

tion is advisable.

yBrake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air. Any absorbed moisture

can cause a dangerous loss of

braking performance.

yIf the vehicle requires frequent re-

filling, there may be a leak. If you

suspect a problem, have the vehi-

cle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

yNever use different brands of

brake fluid together. Also, avoid

mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake flu-

ids even if they are of the same

brand.

yWhen adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

yNever splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake flu-

id may damage them.

yBe careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the ex-

haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

B00322

Maintenance and service 11-21

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move slight-

ly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for ap-

proximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake boost-

er operates properly if the pedal stroke de-

creases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and re-

serve distance according to the mainte-

nance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

Checking the brake pedal free

play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check

the free play with a force of less than 2 lbs

(10 N, 1 kg).

If the free play is not within proper specifi-

cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Checking the brake pedal re-

serve distance

1) More than 2.16 in (55 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

B00323

B00324

11-22 Maintenance and service

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

The front disc brake and the right rear disc

brake have audible wear indicators on the

brake pads. If the brake pads wear close

to their service limit, the wear indicator

makes a very audible scraping noise

when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After re-

placement, the new parts must be broken

in as follows:

TBrake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph

(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal

lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

TParking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx-

imately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. Press the parking brake pedal SLOW-

LY and GENTLY. (Pressing with a force of

approximately 34 lbs [150 N, 15 kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220

yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake pedal.

Parking brake stroke:

5 – 6 notches / 67 lbs (300 N, 30 kg)

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will re-

sult in the need for costly brake ro-

tor repair or replacement.

700040

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

Pressing the parking brake pedal

too forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be cer-

tain to press the pedal slowly and

gently.

Maintenance and service 11-23

– CONTINUED –

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When

the parking brake is properly adjusted,

braking power is fully applied by pressing

the pedal five to six notches gently but

firmly (approximately 67 lbs, 300 N, 30

kg). If the parking brake pedal stroke is not

within the specified range, have the brake

system checked and adjusted at your

SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

TAll season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new ve-

hicle are all season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road con-

ditions. However all season tires do not of-

fer as much traction performance as win-

ter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or

on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

TSummer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to re-

place all four tires.

TWinter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as sum-

mer tires and all season tires on roads oth-

er than snow-covered and icy roads.

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the ve-

hicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to come on. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pres-

sures higher than those shown on the tire

placard. Specifically, inflate them by an

extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for ev-

B00325

11-24 Maintenance and service

ery difference of 10°F (5.6°C) between the

temperature in the garage and the tem-

perature outside. By way of example, the

following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not go off, the

tire pressure monitoring system may not

be functioning normally. In this event, go

to a SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any in-

crease in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure warn-

ing light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a

switch to snow tires) and new TPMS

valves are installed on the newly fitted

wheels. Have this work performed by a

SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-

ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

in the instrument panel will flash.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal op-

eration of the tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]

front rear

30°F (–1°C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

10°F (–12°C) 38

(265, 2.65)

(255, 2.55)

–10°F

(–23°C)

40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not come on briefly after the ig-

nition switch is turned ON or the

light is flashing, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light comes on while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep driv-

ing straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off

the road to a safe place. Otherwise

an accident involving serious vehi-

cle damage and serious personal in-

jury could occur.

Maintenance and service 11-25

– CONTINUED –

Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immediate-

ly if you find any problem.

NOTE

yWhen the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on oth-

er rough surfaces. If doing so is un-

avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and ap-

proach the curbs as squarely as possi-

ble. Also, make sure the tires are not

pressed against the curb when you

park the vehicle.

yIf you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the ve-

hicle in a straight line, one of the tires

and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive

slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the vehi-

cle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to in-

crease. Be careful not to mistakenly re-

lease air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

If this light still comes on while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may have significant damage

and a fast leak that causes the tire to

lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash. This in-

dicates the TPMS is unable to moni-

tor all four road wheels. Contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible for tire and sensor replace-

ment and/or system resetting. If the

light flashes, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

B00326

11-26 Maintenance and service

NOTE

yThe air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.

yThe tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

yCorrect tire pressure (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is re-

sponsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel

consumption is also lower.

yAbnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

Do not let air out of warm tires to ad-

just pressure. Doing so will result in

low tire pressure.

B00050 B00051

Maintenance and service 11-27

– CONTINUED –

yAbnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magni-

fies the effects of road-surface bumps and

dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance caus-

es the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not cor-

rectly balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also

have them adjusted after tire repairs and

after tire rotation.

NOTE

Loss of correct wheel alignment* caus-

es the tires to wear on one side and re-

duces the vehicle’s running stability.

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you no-

tice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold

each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum

straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

mance.

Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indica-

tor, which becomes visible when the depth

of the tread grooves decreases to 0.071 in

(1.8 mm). A tire must be replaced when

the tread wear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread.

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

B00052

123

B00327

11-28 Maintenance and service

NOTE

For safety, inspect the tire tread regu-

larly and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visible.

Tire rotation

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure

that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to

rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500

km). Rotating the tires involves switching

the front and rear tires on the right-hand

side of the vehicle and similarly switching

the front and rear tires on the left-hand

side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept

on its original side of the vehicle.)

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation. After tire rota-

tion, adjust the tire pressures and make

sure the wheel nuts are correctly tight-

ened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and in-

tegral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fit-

ted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the vehi-

cle and were selected to give the best pos-

sible combination of running performance,

ride comfort, and service life. It is essential

for every tire to have a size and construc-

tion matching those shown on the tire

placard and to have a speed symbol and

load index matching those shown on the

tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to re-

place the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU rec-

ommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn be-

yond the acceptable limit and must

be replaced immediately. With a tire

in this condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can cause

the vehicle to hydroplane. The re-

sulting loss of vehicle control can

lead to an accident.

B00054

Maintenance and service 11-29

Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

Aluminum wheels

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

yWhen any of the wheels is removed and

replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tight-

en it to the specified torque.

yNever apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

yNever let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

yBe sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

yWhen wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to re-

place them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

yAll four tires must be the same in

terms of manufacturer, brand

(tread pattern), construction, de-

gree of wear, speed symbol, load

index and size. Mixing tires of dif-

ferent types, sizes or degrees of

wear can result in damage to the

vehicle’s power train. Use of dif-

ferent types or sizes of tires can

also dangerously reduce control-

lability and braking performance

and can lead to an accident.

yUse only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Do-

ing so can dangerously reduce

controllability, resulting in an ac-

cident.

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could in-

terfere with brake caliper operation

and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

11-30 Maintenance and service

Windshield washer fluid

If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the windshield washer fluid warning

light comes on or the supply of washer flu-

id drops, check the level of washer fluid in

the tank.

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level

gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).

If the level is near the “Low” mark, add flu-

id until it reaches the “Hi” level on the level

gauge.

After adding fluid, make sure the wind-

shield washer fluid warning light has gone

out.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean wa-

ter.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-

ature varies according to how much it is di-

luted, as indicated in the following table.

In order to prevent freezing of washer flu-

id, check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid con-

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

300544

B00328

Low

300172

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30% 10.4°F (–12°C)

50% –4°F (–20°C)

100% –49°F (–45°C)

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Maintenance and service 11-31

– CONTINUED –

centration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside tem-

perature, it may freeze and block the noz-

zles.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials

on the windshield or the wiper blade re-

sults in jerky wiper operation and streak-

ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the

streaks after operating the windshield

washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,

clean the outer surface of the windshield

(or rear window) and the wiper blades us-

ing a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After

cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper

blades with clean water. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when you rinse

the windshield with water.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures. Be sure to use genuine SUBARU

wiper blade rubbers as replacements.

Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

yDo not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as

paint thinner or benzene. This will

cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

yWhen you wish to raise the pas-

senger-side wiper arm, first raise

the driver-side wiper arm. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

yReturn the passenger-side wiper

arm to its original position before

returning the driver-side wiper

arm to its original position. Other-

wise, the passenger-side wiper

assembly and driver-side wiper

assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.

B00329

11-32 Maintenance and service

2. While pressing the wiper blade stop-

per, slide the wiper blade assembly down-

ward.

3. Remove the wiper blade assembly

from the wiper arm.

4. Put the wiper blade assembly on the

wiper arm and slide it upward while press-

ing the wiper blade stopper. Make sure

that it locks in place.

5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Windshield wiper blade rub-

ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the blade rub-

ber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the met-

al support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and in-

stall them in the new blade rubber.

Do not let go of the wiper arm until it

touches the windshield. Letting the

wiper arm snap onto the windshield

could damage it.

B00396

Be sure to install each metal spine

so as to fit its groove completely on

the center ridge of the blade rubber.

Doing otherwise may result in dislo-

cation and breakage of the spine

during wiper operation.

B00397

Maintenance and service 11-33

– CONTINUED –

3. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the end

of the metal support between the stoppers

on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is

not retained properly, the wiper blade may

scratch the windshield.

Rear window wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear win-

dow.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

Rear window wiper blade rub-

ber

B00398

B00399

700063

700064

700017

11-34 Maintenance and service

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber as-

sembly to unlock it from the plastic sup-

port.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and in-

stall them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber as-

sembly, then slide the blade rubber as-

sembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

B00064

B00333

B00066

B00067

Maintenance and service 11-35

Battery

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

yBefore beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks. Bat-

teries give off a gas which is high-

ly flammable and explosive.

yFor safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

yDo not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water, and

seek medical attention immediate-

ly.

yTo lessen the risk of sparks, re-

move rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never al-

low metal tools to contact the pos-

itive battery terminal and anything

connected to it WHILE you are at

the same time in contact with any

other metallic portion of the vehi-

cle because a short circuit will re-

sult.

yKeep everyone including children

away from the battery.

yCharge the battery in a well-venti-

lated area.

yBattery posts, terminals, and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer. Wash

hands after handling.

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

11-36 Maintenance and service

Fuses

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One

is located under the instrument panel be-

hind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side.

Open the lid that is located above the

hood release knob and pull it toward you

to remove it.

The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.

The spare fuses are stored in the main

fuse box cover in the engine compart-

ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

B00334

B00335

B00336

B00198

B00337

Maintenance and service 11-37

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electri-

cal controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical accesso-

ries.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and

the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter

12 in this manual show the circuit for each

fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, re-

place it with a spare fuse of the same rat-

ing.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this indi-

cates that its system has a problem. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt dur-

ing an overload to prevent damage to the

wiring harness and electrical equipment.

Check the main fuses if any electrical

component fails to operate (except the

starter motor) and other fuses are good. A

melted main fuse must be replaced. Use

only replacements with the same speci-

fied rating as the melted main fuse. If a

main fuse blows after it is replaced, have

the electrical system checked by your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

B00338 600160

B00336

11-38 Maintenance and service

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer be-

fore installing fog lights or any other elec-

trical equipment in your vehicle. Such ac-

cessories may cause the electronic sys-

tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly

installed or if they are not suited for the ve-

hicle.

Maintenance and service 11-39

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs

691011

121314

54231

715

8B00339

11-40 Maintenance and service

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-65W H9

2) Low beam headlight 12V-55W H7

3) Front turn signal/Parking light 12V-27/8W –

4) Parking/Front side marker light 12V-5W –

5) Map light 12V-8W –

6) Dome light 12V-5W –

7) Door step light 12V-3W –

8) Fog light 12V-55W H3

9) Cargo area light 12V-13W –

10) Tail light 12V-3.8W 194

11) Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

12) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (W21W)

13) Backup light 12V-16W 921

14) Rear gate light 12V-5W (W5W)

15) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168

Headlight

NOTE

yIf headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

yIt may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re-

place the bulbs if necessary.

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could re-

sult in a fire.

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface develop

into hot spots, causing the bulb to

break. If there are finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface, wipe

them away with a soft cloth mois-

tened with alcohol.

Maintenance and service 11-41

– CONTINUED –

TLow beam light bulbs

1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

counterclockwise.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Remove the retainer spring.

4. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer

spring securely.

5. Reconnect the electrical connector.

6. Install the bulb cover.

THigh beam light bulbs

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with new one.

4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight as-

sembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

Parking light

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it counter-

clockwise.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

B00340

B00341

B00342

B00343

B00344

11-42 Maintenance and service

new bulb.

3. Set the bulb socket into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise until it

locks.

4. Install the headlight assembly and the

front grille in the reverse order of removal.

Front turn signal light

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it counter-

clockwise.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pushing it and turning counterclockwise.

Install a new bulb.

3. Set the bulb socket into the headlight

assembly and turn it clockwise until it

locks.

4. Install the headlight assembly and the

front grille in the reverse order of removal.

Front fog light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have your SUBARU dealer replace the

bulbs if necessary.

Rear combination lights

1. Remove the two covers by inserting

the tip of a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws.

B00345

B00346

B00347

B00348

Maintenance and service 11-43

– CONTINUED –

1) Brake/tail light

2) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pushing it and turning counterclockwise.

Install a new bulb.

5. Set the bulb holder into the rear combi-

nation light assembly and turn it clockwise

until it locks.

6. Close the cover and latch the lock.

7. Reinstall the rear combination light as-

sembly.

Backup light/Tail light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove

the light cover from the rear gate trim.

1) Tail light

2) Backup light

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise. Install the light cover on the

rear gate.

Rear gate light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove

the rear gate light assembly from the rear

gate trim.

B00349

B00350

B00351

B00350

11-44 Maintenance and service

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

3. Install the rear gate light assembly on

the rear gate.

License plate light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens and cover.

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

Dome light

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

B00352

B00353

B00354

B00355

Maintenance and service 11-45

– CONTINUED –

Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertain-

ment

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the

bulb straight downward to remove it. In-

stall a new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

Map light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at

its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the

bulb straight downward to remove it.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

Door step light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have your SUBARU dealer replace the

bulbs if necessary.

700083

700084

B00356

700084

11-46 Maintenance and service

Cargo area light

1. Remove the cargo area light assembly

by prying the edge of the light with a flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens from the cargo area

light assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

700078

700079

Specifications

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions ............................................................. 12-2

Engine ...................................................................... 12-2

Electrical system .................................................... 12-3

Capacities ................................................................ 12-3

Tires ......................................................................... 12-3

Wheel alignment ..................................................... 12-4

Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-5

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ......................................................... 12-5

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ......................................................... 12-7

Bulb chart ............................................................ 12-8

Vehicle identification ......................................... 12-9

12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions

in (mm)

Engine

Overall length 189.8 (4,822)

Overall width 73.9 (1,878)

Overall height 66.4 (1,686)

Wheel base 108.2 (2,749)

Tread Front 62.2 (1,580)

Rear 62.1 (1,578)

Ground clearance 8.4 (213)

Engine model EZ30D

(3.0-liter, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 3,000 (183)

Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.51 × 3.15 (89.2 × 80.0)

Compression ratio 10.7 : 1

Firing order 1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4

Specifications 12-3

– CONTINUED –

Electrical system

Capacities

Tires

Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23L (12V–52AH)

Alternator 12V–110A

Spark plugs ILFR6B (NGK)

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)

Transmission fluid 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)

AT differential gear oil 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.9 US qt (0.9 liter, 0.8 Imp qt)

Engine coolant 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

Tire size P255/55R18

Wheel size 18 × 8JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear at trailer towing 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T165/80R17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

12-4 Specifications

Wheel alignment

Toe Front 0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0.0787 in (2 mm)

Camber Front 0°00’

Rear –0°31’

Specifications 12-5

– CONTINUED –

Fuses and circuits

Fuse panel located in the passenger compart-

ment

27 28 29 30 31 32 33

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

6789101112

12345

C00004

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

120A yTrailer hitch connector

2Empty

315A yDoor locking

47.5A yFront wiper deicer relay

yMoonroof

57.5A yCombination meter

67.5A yRemote control rear view mirrors

ySeat heater relay

715A yCombination meter

yIntegrated unit

820A yStop light

920A yMirror heater

yFront wiper deicer

10 7.5A yPower supply (Battery)

11 7.5A yTurn signal unit

12 15A yAutomatic transmission unit

ySRS airbag system (Sub)

yEngine control unit

yIntegrated unit

13 20A yCargo socket

12-6 Specifications

14 15A yPosition light

yTail light

yRear combination light

15 20A yConsole socket

16 10A yIllumination

17 15A ySeat heaters

18 10A yBackup light

19 7.5A yHeadlight right side relay

20 Empty

21 7.5A yStarter relay

22 15A yAir conditioner

yRear window defogger relay coil

23 15A yRear wiper

yRear window washer

24 15A yAudio unit

25 15A ySRS airbag system (Main)

26 7.5A yPower window relay

27 15A yRear blower fan

28 15A yRear blower fan

29 15A yFog light

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

30 30A yFront wiper

31 7.5A yAuto air conditioner unit

yIntegrated unit

32 7.5A yHeadlight left side relay

33 7.5A yVehicle dynamics control unit

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

Specifications 12-7

Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) Main fuse

7 8

910

11 13

12 14

4 5

C00100

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

130A yVehicle dynamics control unit

225A yMain fan

325A yMain fan

415A yHeadlight (right side)

515A yHeadlight (left side)

620A yBackup

715A yHorn

825A yRear window defogger

915A yFuel pump

10 15A yAutomatic transmission control unit

11 7.5A yEngine control unit

12 15A yTurn and hazard warning flasher

13 20A yParking switch

14 7.5A yAlternator

12-8 Specifications

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb No.

Headlight

Low beam 12V-55W H7

High beam 12V-65W H9

Fog light 12V-55W H3

Front turn signal/Park-

ing light

12V-27/8W –

Parking/Front side

marker light

12V-5W –

Rear combination light

Rear turn signal

light

12V-21W (W21W)

Brake/tail 12V-21/5W (W21/5W)

Tail light 12V-3.8W 194

Backup light 12V-16W 921

License plate light 12V-5W 168

Cargo area light 12V-13W –

Dome light 12V-5W –

Map light 12V-8W –

Door step light 12V-3W –

Rear gate light 12V-5W (W5W)

Specifications 12-9

Vehicle identification

5643

7C00110

1) Vehicle identification number

2) Certification and bar code label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Vehicle identification number plate

5) Model number plate

6) Emission control label

7) Fuel label

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ............................................................. 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure .................. 13-5

Glossary of tire terminology .................................. 13-6

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ..... 13-7

Vehicle load limit – how to determine ................... 13-8

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load

capacities .............................................................. 13-10

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on tires ................... 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 13-11

Uniform tire quality grading standards ............ 13-12

Treadwear ................................................................ 13-12

Traction AA, A, B, C ................................................ 13-12

Temperature A, B, C ............................................... 13-12

Reporting safety defects (USA) ......................... 13-13

13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Consumer inf ormation and Re porting safety d efects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been com-

piled according to Code of Federal Regu-

lations “Title 49, Part 575”.

Tire information

Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire

manufacturers. These marking can

provide you with useful information on

the tire.

TTire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with P-

Metric tire size. It is important to un-

derstand the sizing system in select-

ing the proper tire for your vehicles.

Here is a brief review of the tire sizing

system with a breakdown of its indi-

vidual elements.

VP Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters. To

convert millimeters into inches, divide

by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section

Height divided by Section Width)

helps provide more dimensional infor-

mation about the tire size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on light

duty vehicles such as passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷

section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

VLoad and Speed Rating Descrip-

tions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number des-

ignation is its load index. Second, the

letter designation indicates the tire’s

speed rating.

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

P 255 / 55 R 18

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

P 255 / 55 R 18 104 H

Size designation (6) (7)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

which specifies the maximum load a

tire can carry at the speed indicated

by its speed symbol, at maximum in-

flation pressure.

For example, “104” means 1,984 lbs

(900 kg), “100” means 1,764 lbs (800

kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600 kg)

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability to

travel at established and predeter-

mined speeds.

For example, “H” means 130 mph

(210 km/h)

TTire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of four

groups. Here is a brief review of the

TIN with a breakdown of its individual

elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the week,

starting with “01” to represent the first

full week of the calendar year; the

second two figures represent the

year. For example, 0101 means the

1st week of 2001.

TOther markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

VMaximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which this tire may be inflated. For

example, “300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX.

PRESS”

VMaximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum per-

missible weight load for this tire. For

example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg (1609

LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX.

PRESS.”

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a

load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

ySpeed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle. Put-

ting a speed rated tire on any

vehicle does not mean the ve-

hicle can be operated at the

tire’s rated speed.

yThe speed rating is void if the

tires are worn out, damaged,

repaired, retreaded, or other-

wise altered from their original

condition. If tires are repaired,

retreaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be suitable

for original equipment tire de-

signed loads and speeds.

DOT XX XX XXX XXXX

(1) (2) (3) (4)

13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

VConstruction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

VConstruction

The generic name of each cord mate-

rial used in the plies (both sidewall

and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 NYLON

SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER”

VUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire qual-

ity grading standards” in this chapter.

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the vehi-

cle. Putting a load rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean the

vehicle can be loaded up to the

tire’s rated load.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5

– CONTINUED –

Recommended tire inflation pressure

TRecommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

Tire size P255/55R18 104H

Wheel size 18 × 8JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear at trailer towing 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T165/80R17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TVehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side B-pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure on each tire at maxi-

mum loaded vehicle weight, seating

capacity and loading information.

TAdverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to rapidly

become hot. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread separa-

tion, and failure of the tire(s). Possi-

ble resulting loss of vehicle control

could lead to an accident.

TMeasuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper infla-

tion

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and be-

fore any long journey. Check the tire

pressures when the tires are cold.

Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the specific values.

Driving even a short distance warms

up the tires and increases the tire

pressures. Also, the tire pressures

are affected by the outside tempera-

ture. It is best to check tire pressure

outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air in-

side it expands, causing the tire pres-

sure to increase. Be careful not to

mistakenly release air from a warm

tire to reduce its pressure.

Glossary of tire terminology

yCold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

yMaximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which a tire may be inflated.

yRecommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

yIntended outboard sidewall

1)The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding

on the other sidewall of the tire, or

2)The outward facing sidewall of an

B00326

SEATING CAPACITY:TOTAL 7

ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE

230kPa,33PSI

220kPa,32PSI

P255/55R18

T165/80R17 420kPa,60PSI

FRONT 2:REAR 5

The combined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 525kg or 1157lbs.

SEE OWNER’S MANUAL

FOR

ADDITIONAL

INFORMA

TION

D00100

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7

– CONTINUED –

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounting on a vehicle.

yAccessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of floor mats, leather seats

and cross bars to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether installed

or not).

yCurb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and

coolant and air conditioning.

yMaximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory

weight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.

yNormal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants (3 occupants).

yOccupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle,

2 in front, 1 in rear seat.

yProduction options weight

The combined weight of those in-

stalled regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in ex-

cess of those standards items which

they replace, not previously consid-

ered in curb weight or accessory

weight.

yVehicle capacity weight

The total weight of cargo, luggage

and occupants that can be added to

the vehicle.

yVehicle maximum load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is deter-

mined by distributing to each axle its

share of the maximum loaded vehicle

weight and dividing by two.

yVehicle normal load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is deter-

mined by distributing to each axle its

share of the curb weight, accessory

weight, and normal occupant weight

and dividing by two.

Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

yCheck on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage, nails,

and stones. At the same time, check

the tires for abnormal wear.

y Inspect the tire tread regularly and

replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible. When

a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes

visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac-

ceptable limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this condi-

tion, driving at even low speeds in wet

weather can cause the vehicle to hy-

droplane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an acci-

dent.

yTo maximize the life of each tire and

ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it

is best to rotate the tires every 7,500

miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires

involves switching the front and rear

tires on the right-hand side of the ve-

hicle and similarly switching the front

and rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on

its original side of the vehicle.) Re-

place any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation. After tire ro-

tation, adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correct-

ly tightened. A tightening torque spec-

ification and a tightening sequence

specification for the wheel nuts can be

found “Flat tires” in chapter 9.

13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Vehicle load limit – how to de-

termine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

B-pillar. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows seat-

ing capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all passen-

gers and their belongings, any cargo,

any optional equipment such as a

trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

Therefore cargo capacity can be cal-

culated by the following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit – (total

weight of occupants + total weight of

optional equipment + tongue load of a

trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing”

in chapter 8.

TCalculating total and load capac-

ities varying seating configura-

tions

Calculate the available load capacity

as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle

is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which is indicat-

ed on the vehicle placard with the

statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never

exceed 525 kg or 1,157 lbs”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 1,212 lbs (550

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity by subtracting the total weight from

the vehicle capacity weight of 800 lbs

(363 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 121 lbs (55 kg) of cargo can be

carried.

D00101

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 882 lbs (400 kg)

= 1,036 lbs (470 kg)

(Occupant) (Cargo)

Available Load Capacity

(Vehicle

capacity weight)

(Total weight)

= 121 lbs (55 kg)

1,157 lbs

(525 kg)

1,036 lbs

(470 kg)

–

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9

– CONTINUED –

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing 176

lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehi-

cle (bringing the number of occupants

to two), the calculations are as fol-

lows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 55 lbs (25 kg), so

the cargo weight must be reduced by

55 lbs (25 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle

is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which is indicat-

ed on the vehicle placard with the

statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never

exceed 525 kg or 1,157 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one oc-

cupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus

cargo weighing 705 lbs (320 kg). In

addition, the vehicle is fitted with a

trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to

which is attached a trailer weighing

1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer

weight is applied to the trailer tongue

(i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

D00102

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

+ 882 lbs (400 kg)

= 1,212 lbs (550 kg)

(Occupant)

(Cargo)

Available Load Capacity

(Vehicle

capacity weight)

(Total weight)

1,157 lbs

(525 kg)

1,212 lbs

(550 kg)

= –55 lbs (–25 kg)

–

D00103

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 705 lbs (320 kg)

+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

= 1,069 lbs (485 kg)

(Occupant) (Cargo)

(Trailer hitch) (Tongue load)

13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 88 lbs (40 kg) of cargo can be

carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing 143

lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs

(18 kg) now enter the same vehicle

(bringing the number of occupants to

three), and a child restraint system

weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in

the vehicle for the child to use, the cal-

culations are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 105 lbs (48 kg), so

the cargo weight must be reduced by

105 lbs (48 kg) or more.

Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum load

ratings must exceed the maximum

loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In

addition, sum of the maximum load

ratings of two front tires and of two

rear tires must exceed each axle’s

maximum loaded capacity (“GAWR”).

Original equipment tires are designed

to fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle weight

is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). And each axle’s

Available Load Capacity

(Vehicle

capacity weight)

(Total weight)

1,157 lbs

(525 kg)

1,069 lbs

(485 kg)

= 88 lbs (40 kg)

–

D00104

Total weight

(Occupant)

(Cargo)

(Trailer hitch)

(Child restraint)

(Tongue load)

165 lbs

(75 kg)

143 lbs

(65 kg)

40 lbs

(18 kg)

11 lbs (5 kg) 705 lbs (320 kg)

22 lbs (10 kg) 176 lbs (80 kg)

= 1,263 lbs (573 kg)

Available Load Capacity

(Vehicle

capacity weight)

(Total weight)

1,157 lbs

(525 kg)

1,263 lbs

(573 kg)

= –105 lbs (–48 kg)

–

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11

maximum loaded capacity is referred

to Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR). The GVWR and each axle’s

GAWR are shown on the vehicle cer-

tification label affixed to the driver’s

door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s

suspension, axles and other parts of

the body.

Therefore, this means that the vehicle

cannot necessarily be loaded up to

the tire’s maximum load rating on the

tire sidewall.

Adverse safety consequenc-

es of overloading on handling

and stopping and on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle han-

dling, stopping distance, vehicle and

tire as shown in the following. This

could lead to an accident and possibly

result in severe personal injury.

yVehicle stability will deteriorate.

yHeavy and/or high-mounted loads

could increase the risk of rollover.

yStopping distance will increase.

yBrakes could overheat and fail.

ySuspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break or

experience accelerated wear that will

shorten vehicle life.

yTires could fail.

yTread separation could occur.

yTire could separate from its rim.

Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX pounds” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs

(635 kg). and there will be five- 150

lbs (68 kg) passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1,400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safe-

ly exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduc-

es the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the relative

performance of passenger car tires in

the area of treadwear, traction, and

temperature resistance. This is to aid

the consumer in making an informed

choice in the purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new pneu-

matic tires for use on passenger cars.

However, they do not apply to deep

tread, winter type snow tires, space-

saver or temporary use spare tires,

tires with nominal rim diameters of 12

inches or less, or to some limited pro-

duction tires.

All passenger car tires must confirm

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the

tire when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified government test

course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times

as well on the government course as

a tire graded 100. The relative perfor-

mance of tires depends upon the ac-

tual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high tempera-

ture can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13

Reporting safety defects

(USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety de-

fect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your deal-

er, or Subaru of America, Inc. To

contact NHTSA, you may either

call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-

free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-

0123 in the Washington D.C. area)

or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation, Washing-

ton, D.C. 20590. You can also ob-

tain other information about motor

vehicle safety from the Hotline.

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combina-

tion, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.

Index

14-2 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................................... 7-16

Warning light ....................................................... 3-15, 7-17

Accessories .................................................................... 11-38

Accessory power outlet ...................................................... 6-8

Active head restraint ........................................................... 1-5

Air cleaner element ........................................................ 11-13

Air filtration system ........................................................... 4-11

Air flow ............................................................................... 4-2

Alarm system .................................................................... 2-14

All-Wheel Drive warning light ........................................... 3-17

Aluminum wheels ........................................................... 11-29

Antenna system ................................................................. 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................... 7-16

Arming the system ............................................................ 2-15

Armrest ............................................................................. 1-11

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light .................................. 3-13

Audio control buttons ....................................................... 5-22

Audio set ............................................................................ 5-3

Auto-dimming mirror/compass ......................................... 3-34

Automatic climate control system ....................................... 4-5

Automatic transmission ...................................................... 7-8

Capacities .................................................................... 12-3

Fluid ........................................................................... 11-15

Manual mode ............................................................... 7-11

Selector lever ................................................................. 7-9

Shift lock release ......................................................... 7-14

Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ................. 3-13

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-16

Battery ............................................................................ 11-35

Jump starting ............................................................... 9-11

Replacement (Remote keyless entry system) ............. 2-10

Brake

Booster ...................................................................... 11-21

Fluid ........................................................................... 11-20

Pad and lining ............................................................ 11-22

Pedal .......................................................................... 11-21

Brake pedal

Free play .................................................................... 11-21

Reserve distance ....................................................... 11-21

Brake system .................................................................... 7-15

Warning light ................................................................ 3-16

Braking ............................................................................. 7-15

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................ 11-22

Tips .............................................................................. 7-15

Bulb

Chart ............................................................................ 12-8

Replacing ................................................................... 11-39

Capacities ......................................................................... 12-3

Cargo area

Light ............................................................................... 6-2

Tie-down hooks ........................................................... 6-12

Catalytic converter .............................................................. 8-3

Center

Console .......................................................................... 6-5

Ventilators ...................................................................... 4-4

Changing

Flat tire ........................................................................... 9-7

Oil and oil filter ............................................................. 11-7

Charge warning light ......................................................... 3-13

Index 14-3

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

lamp .............................................................................. 3-12

Checking

Brake pedal free play ................................................. 11-21

Brake pedal reserve distance .................................... 11-21

Engine oil level ............................................................ 11-7

Fluid level ............................................ 11-15, 11-19, 11-20

Gear oil level .............................................................. 11-17

Child restraint systems ..................................................... 1-30

Installation with seatbelt .............................................. 1-33

Lower and tether anchorages ...................................... 1-38

Child safety ............................................................................ 5

Locks ........................................................................... 2-19

Chime

Key ................................................................................ 3-4

Seatbelt ....................................................................... 1-17

Cleaning

Aluminum wheels ........................................................ 10-3

Interior ......................................................................... 10-4

Ventilator grille ............................................................. 4-10

Climate control system ....................................................... 4-5

Clock ................................................................................ 3-21

Coat hook ......................................................................... 6-10

Cooling system ............................................................... 11-10

Corrosion protection ................................................ 8-10, 10-3

Cruise control ................................................................... 7-27

Set indicator light ......................................................... 3-20

Cup holder .......................................................................... 6-6

Daytime running light system ........................................... 3-27

Differential gear oil

Front ........................................................................... 11-16

Rear ........................................................................... 11-17

Dimensions ....................................................................... 12-2

Disarming the system ....................................................... 2-16

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................... 7-16

Dome light ................................................................ 6-2, 11-44

Door locks ........................................................................... 2-4

Door open warning light .................................................... 3-17

Drive belts ....................................................................... 11-15

Driving

All-Wheel Drive vehicle ................................................ 3-17

Car phone/cell phone ........................................................ 7

Drinking ............................................................................. 6

Drugs ................................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ........................................................... 8-4

Pets ................................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ...................................................... 8-9

Tips ....................................................................... 7-13, 8-4

Tired or sleepy .................................................................. 7

Electrical system ............................................................... 12-3

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ........... 7-18

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................ 1-16

Engine

Compartment overview ................................................ 11-6

Coolant ....................................................................... 11-11

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................................... 8-2

Hood ............................................................................ 11-4

Oil ................................................................................. 11-7

Overheating ................................................................. 9-14

Starting ........................................................................... 7-7

14-4 Index

Stopping ........................................................................ 7-8

Exterior care ..................................................................... 10-2

Flat tires ............................................................................. 9-7

Floor mat .......................................................................... 6-11

Fluid level

Automatic transmission ............................................. 11-15

Brake ......................................................................... 11-20

Power steering ........................................................... 11-19

Front

Differential gear oil ..................................................... 11-16

Fog light ..................................................................... 11-42

Fog light switch ............................................................ 3-28

Seatbelt pretensioners ................................................. 1-27

Seats ............................................................................. 1-2

Fuel .................................................................................... 7-2

Economy hints ............................................................... 8-2

Filler lid and cap ............................................................ 7-3

Gauge ............................................................................ 3-8

Requirements ................................................................ 7-2

Fuel gauge ......................................................................... 3-8

Fuses ............................................................................. 11-36

Fuses and circuits ............................................................ 12-5

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .................................. 8-13

Glove box ........................................................................... 6-4

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ............................. 8-13

Hazard warning flasher ....................................................... 3-5

Head restraint adjustment (Front) ....................................... 1-4

Headlight

Flasher ......................................................................... 3-26

Indicator light ............................................................... 3-20

Headlights .............................................................. 3-26, 11-40

High beam indicator light .................................................. 3-20

Home link® ....................................................................... 6-13

Horn .................................................................................. 3-37

Hose and connections .................................................... 11-11

Ignition switch ..................................................................... 3-3

Light ............................................................................... 3-4

Illuminated entry ................................................................. 2-9

Illumination brightness control .......................................... 3-27

Immobilizer system ............................................................. 2-3

Indicator light ............................................................... 3-19

Indicator light

Cruise control ............................................................... 3-20

Cruise control set ......................................................... 3-20

Front fog ...................................................................... 3-20

Headlight ...................................................................... 3-20

High beam ................................................................... 3-20

Select lever/Gear position ............................................ 3-20

Turn signal ................................................................... 3-20

Inside mirror ...................................................................... 3-34

Interior light ......................................................................... 6-2

Index 14-5

Jack and jack handle ........................................................ 9-19

Jump starting .................................................................... 9-11

Key

Keyless entry system ..................................................... 2-8

Number .......................................................................... 2-2

Reminder chime ............................................................ 3-4

Keys ................................................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials ...................................................... 10-4

Light

Cargo area ..................................................................... 6-2

Control switch .............................................................. 3-26

Dome ............................................................................. 6-2

Map ................................................................................ 6-3

Light control switch ........................................................... 3-26

Loading your vehicle ........................................................ 8-11

Low fuel warning light ................................................ 3-8, 3-17

Low tire pressure warning light ......................................... 3-14

Lumbar support .................................................................. 1-5

Main fuse ........................................................................ 11-37

Maintenance

Precautions .................................................................. 11-3

Schedule ...................................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt ....................................................................... 1-26

Tools ............................................................................ 9-19

Manual mode .................................................................... 7-11

Map light .................................................................. 6-3, 11-45

Maximum load limits ......................................................... 8-18

Meters and gauges ............................................................. 3-5

Mirrors ............................................................................... 3-34

Moonroof ........................................................................... 2-23

Multi function display ........................................................ 3-23

New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) ....................................................................... 8-2

Odometer ............................................................................ 3-6

Oil filter .............................................................................. 11-7

Oil level

Engine .......................................................................... 11-7

Front differential gear ................................................. 11-16

Rear differential .......................................................... 11-17

Oil pressure warning light ................................................. 3-13

On-pavement and off road driving ...................................... 8-5

Outside mirrors ................................................................. 3-36

Outside temperature indication ......................................... 3-21

Overheating engine .......................................................... 9-14

Parking

Brake stroke ............................................................... 11-23

Light switch .................................................................. 3-28

Periodic inspection .............................................................. 8-4

14-6 Index

Power

Door locking switches .................................................... 2-6

Seat ............................................................................... 1-3

Steering fluid ............................................................. 11-19

Windows ...................................................................... 2-19

Precautions against vehicle modification ................ 1-29, 1-68

Preparing to drive ............................................................... 7-6

Printed antenna .................................................................. 5-2

Rear

Air conditioner ................................................................ 4-9

Combination lights ..................................................... 11-42

Differential gear oil ..................................................... 11-17

Gate ............................................................................. 2-22

Seats ............................................................................. 1-6

Rear seat/Second seat ....................................................... 1-6

Rear window

Defogger button ........................................................... 3-33

Wiper and washer switch ............................................. 3-32

Recommended

Automatic transmission fluid ...................................... 11-16

Brake fluid ................................................................. 11-20

OIL grade and viscosity .............. 11-9, 11-10, 11-17, 11-18

Power steering fluid ................................................... 11-19

Spark plugs ............................................................... 11-14

Remote keyless entry system ............................................ 2-8

Replacement

Brake pad and lining .................................................. 11-22

Wiper blades .............................................................. 11-31

Replacing

Air cleaner element .................................................... 11-13

Battery (Remote keyless entry system) ....................... 2-10

Lost transmitters (keyless entry system) ...................... 2-11

Replacing bulbs .............................................................. 11-39

Cargo area light ......................................................... 11-46

Dome light .................................................................. 11-44

Door step light ............................................................ 11-45

Front fog light ............................................................. 11-42

Front turn signal light ................................................. 11-42

Headlight .................................................................... 11-40

License plate light ...................................................... 11-44

Map light .................................................................... 11-45

Parking light ............................................................... 11-41

Rear combination light ............................................... 11-42

Rocking the vehicle .......................................................... 8-11

Roof rail and crossbar ...................................................... 8-13

Safety

Precautions when driving .................................................. 4

Symbol .............................................................................. 2

Warnings ........................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric ........................................................................... 10-4

Heater ............................................................................ 1-6

Seatbelt ................................................................................. 4

Maintenance ................................................................ 1-26

Pretensioners ............................................................... 1-27

Safety tips .................................................................... 1-15

Warning light and chime .............................................. 1-17

Seatbelts ........................................................................... 1-15

Second-row seats ............................................................... 1-6

Selector lever ............................................................. 7-9, 7-10

Index 14-7

Position indicator ......................................................... 3-20

Shift lock release .............................................................. 7-14

Snow tires ......................................................................... 8-10

Sounding a panic alarm .................................................... 2-10

Spare tire ............................................................................ 9-2

Spark plugs .................................................................... 11-14

Specifications ................................................................... 12-2

Speedometer ...................................................................... 3-6

SRS

Curtain airbag .............................................................. 1-59

Frontal airbag .............................................................. 1-51

Side airbag .................................................................. 1-59

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) .. 4, 1-44

SRS airbag system warning light ...................................... 3-11

Starting the engine ............................................................. 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. only) ...................................... 7-5

Steering wheel

Power .......................................................................... 7-15

Tilt ................................................................................ 3-37

Stopping the engine ........................................................... 7-8

Storage compartment ......................................................... 6-4

Sun shades ...................................................................... 2-25

Sun visors ........................................................................... 6-3

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................. 1-44

Synthetic leather upholstery ............................................. 10-5

Tachometer ........................................................................ 3-7

Temperature gauge ............................................................ 3-8

Temporary spare tire .......................................................... 9-6

Third-row seat .................................................................. 1-11

Tie-down hooks ................................................................ 9-15

Tilt steering wheel ............................................................. 3-37

Tire

Chains .......................................................................... 8-11

Inspection ................................................................... 11-25

Pressures and wear ................................................... 11-25

Replacement .............................................................. 11-28

Rotation ...................................................................... 11-28

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ......................... 7-24

Tires .................................................................................. 12-3

Types ......................................................................... 11-23

Tires and wheels ............................................................. 11-23

Top tether anchorages ...................................................... 1-41

Towing .............................................................................. 9-15

All wheels on the ground .............................................. 9-18

Flat-bed truck ............................................................... 9-17

Tie-down hooks ............................................................ 9-15

Weight .......................................................................... 8-18

Traction Control system

OFF indicator light ........................................................ 3-18

OFF switch ................................................................... 7-23

Trailer

Hitch ............................................................................. 8-15

Hitches ......................................................................... 8-21

Towing ......................................................................... 8-17

Towing tips ................................................................... 8-23

Trip meter ........................................................................... 3-7

Turn signal

Indicator lights .............................................................. 3-20

Lever ............................................................................ 3-27

Under-floor storage compartment ..................................... 6-12

14-8 Index

Valet mode ....................................................................... 2-17

Vanity mirror ....................................................................... 6-4

Vehicle

Capacity weight ........................................................... 8-12

Identification ................................................................ 12-9

Vehicle Dynamics Control

Operation indicator light ............................................... 3-18

System ........................................................................ 7-19

Warning light ................................................................ 3-18

Ventilator ............................................................................ 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ............................................... 3-9

Warning lights

ABS ............................................................................. 3-15

All-Wheel Drive ............................................................ 3-17

Anti-lock Brake System ............................................... 3-15

AT OIL TEMPerature ................................................... 3-13

Brake system ............................................................... 3-16

Charge ......................................................................... 3-13

CHECK ENGINE ......................................................... 3-12

Door open .................................................................... 3-17

Low fuel ................................................................ 3-8, 3-17

Low tire pressure ......................................................... 3-14

Oil pressure ................................................................. 3-13

Rear differential oil temperature .................................. 3-14

Seatbelt ....................................................................... 3-10

SRS airbag system ...................................................... 3-11

Vehicle Dynamics Control .................................. 3-18, 7-21

Windshield washer fluid ............................................... 3-17

Warranties and maintenance ........................................... 8-17

Washing ............................................................................ 10-2

Waxing and polishing ....................................................... 10-3

Wear indicators ............................................................... 11-27

Wheel

Alignment ..................................................................... 12-4

Balance ...................................................................... 11-27

Replacement .............................................................. 11-29

Windows ........................................................................... 2-19

Windshield

Washer fluid ............................................................... 11-30

Wiper and washer switches ......................................... 3-30

Wiper deicer ................................................................. 3-32

Winter driving ...................................................................... 8-7

Wiper and washer ............................................................. 3-29

000134

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or

higher. For temporary purposes if premium unleaded gasoline is

not available, you may use regular unleaded gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of 87 AKI or higher. For optimum engine performance

and driveability, it is recommended that you use premium grade

unleaded gasoline.

Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Mo-

tor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock

Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

Fuel capacity:

16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

Engine oil:

Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CON-

SERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst mark) dis-

played on the container.

Engine oil capacity:

5.8 US qt (5.5 liters, 4.8 Imp qt)

Cold tire pressure:

Tire size P255/55R18 104H

Wheel size 18 × 8JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear at trailer towing 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T165/80R17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Subaru 2006 B9 Tribeca Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation